JP2021175547A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of excellently controlling a game transferring across a plurality of game states.SOLUTION: In the case where a short-term time shortening game state occurs, when one-time variable display which reaches an upper limit (upper limit game frequency) of a time shortening frequency at the start is reserved, variable display is started right after the short-term time shortening game state starts, a time shortening state flag is off at a timing at which to start performing the variable display, and control of a right start winning device 432 is changed to control (entry normal control) corresponding to a non-time shortening state from control (entry easy control) corresponding to the time shortening state. Thus, in the short-term time shortening game state, a player can concentrate on variable display during execution and display of result information without entry operation of game balls into a game area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters the starting port during a normal gaming state, a starting prize is obtained and a variable display is executed, and a big hit is won by a lottery based on the starting prize, a big hit is won. It is known that a special game state is set after the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, and a large number of game balls can be awarded to the winning opening in the special game state. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning is generated during execution of the variation display based on the start winning, the execution of the variation display for the other start winning can be suspended up to a predetermined maximum number of times. A configuration having a hold function is also known. Further, in this type of gaming machine, after the special gaming state, the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than that of the normal gaming state, or the gaming state is such that the gaming ball is more likely to enter the starting port than the normal gaming state. And the like occur, and it is also known that those game states can be continued up to a predetermined maximum number of games, and the games are diversified.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there may still be room for improvement in the control of gaming that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is, for example, to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing control of a game transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A display device capable of displaying a variation when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variation display.
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the holding means capable of suspending the execution of the variation display for the fulfillment of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters.
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion is provided.
As the game state,
A normal game state in which the game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting unit, and
The easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state.
The result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined, including one or more variation display executed after the winning easy game state and the display of the result information after the one or more variation display. In the normal game state, when the game state transitions to another game state when displayed until the maximum number of games is reached, and the result information corresponding to the winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information. An advantageous gaming state is provided in which the transitioning gaming state after the result information is displayed is determined by a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player from the establishment of the first predetermined condition.
The game state control means
An approach normal control that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal gaming state, and an approach normal control in which the game ball enters the second starting portion from the normal gaming state during the advantageous gaming state. It is intended to perform easy entry control that generates an easy entry easy state.
When the variation display of the number of times that reaches the upper limit number of games is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the approach normal control.
At the start of the advantageous gaming state, the holding means performs different control depending on whether the execution of the variable display is held or not.
When the execution of the variation display is not suspended by the holding means at the start of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy approach control, and the advantageous gaming state is controlled. When the game ball enters the second starting portion after the start of, the first fluctuation display is started, and immediately after the start of the first fluctuation display or until a certain time elapses from the start of the first fluctuation display. During the period of, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the ease of entry control, and the entry is normal after the lapse of the period and before the end of the first variation display. It is characterized in that the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by control.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling a game that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing An exploded perspective view of the central structure Enlarged view of region E1 in FIG. A perspective view of the top plate decoration, the upper left front decoration, and the upper right front decoration as seen from the back side. Partial cross section of the central structure A front view of a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. Front view of the central structure Diagram explaining the shape of the flow passage Enlarged view of region E2 in FIG. Diagram explaining the upper and lower stages An exploded perspective view of the game board Front view of movable body The figure which shows the case where the movable body is arranged in the initial position. The figure which shows the case where a movable body is arranged in a variable display position. The figure which shows the case where a movable body is arranged in an intermediate position The figure which shows the case where the movable body is arranged in the irradiation position A diagram showing the relationship between the lottery contents of special symbols and the transitional gaming state. Flowchart showing progress control of game state A timing chart showing the control of the main control board at the start of the short-term short game state. Flow chart showing operation notification control processing by the sub control board

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, the structural configuration, the electrical configuration, and various control processes of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shown. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively displaced by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which the top plate portion 111, the bottom plate portion 112, the left side plate portion 113, and the right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). The outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 100, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side (left side plate 113 side) of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction. The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being in a state of being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 can be rotated is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upward by a certain amount, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released. NS. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided in the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C capable of rotating operations are provided in these three opening / closing restricting units 150A to 150C. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portions arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation, whereby the open / close prohibition posture corresponding to the open / close prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close allowance posture, the open / close prohibition state and the open / close allowance state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by combining movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed on the rear block 104 in a state where the rear block 104 is prohibited from opening and closing, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been raised.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulation mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement regulation mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow-down regulation piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be displaced to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is open), the pressure of the flow-down regulation piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the switch is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided with respect to the 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached as. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through the opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. The upper protruding portion 217, the lower protruding portion 218 located on the lower side with respect to the upper protruding portion 217 and projecting forward, and the upper protruding portion 217 and the lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted on the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game field. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball pulling mechanism (not shown), and a ball pulling operation member 232 for operating the ball pulling mechanism. The storage section 231 includes an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage section 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage section 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. An outlet (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball pulling mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later flow into the storage unit 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232.

The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. At the back of the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271-275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271-275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion 211. The left edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and the right edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C are provided as light emitting portions, and the frame emits light corresponding to the respective light emitting portions. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 integrally electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device 291. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. A predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 accordingly, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are rented out. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the firing operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of operating in the up, down, left, and right directions. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that operations such as vibration can be performed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and either before or after the input operation or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects involving the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to eject, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are provided in various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271-) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, the recoil prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is generally divided by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 on the game board 400. It is provided with a guide member 335 that guides the vehicle to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes according to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and a main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is housed in the translucent board case 391 sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace like the main control board 920, and the game board 400 is housed in the sub-control board 940. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. In FIG. 7, the movable body 710 (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of a game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device related to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420 (specifically, the lower middle starting winning device 431), and the right side with respect to the central structure 420. The starting device (specifically, the right starting winning device 432) related to the second special symbol arranged on the lower side and the large winning device 433,434 (specifically) arranged on the downstream side of the right starting winning device 432. The right grand prize device 433 and the central grand prize device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the upper and lower upper right sides of the game board 400. It is provided with a combination operating device 435 arranged on the upstream side of the large winning devices 433 and 434, and general winning devices 439A and 439B arranged on the left and right sides of the central winning device 434. Further, the game board 400 includes an upper middle start winning device 632, which is arranged in the upper middle starting winning device 632 and functions in the same manner as the right starting winning device 432 as a starting device related to the second special symbol, and the central structure 420. It is provided with a general winning device 639, which is arranged on the left side and functions in the same manner as the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned lower middle start winning device 431 and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a first start winning switch (first start winning switch 441) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431, and a second starting winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 (first starting winning switch 441). 2nd start winning switch 442), 2nd starting winning switch (2nd starting winning switch 642) for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper middle starting winning device 632, right for detecting the game ball that has entered the right large winning device 433 Grand prize switch 443, central grand prize switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the central grand prize device 434, a winning combination operation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, and a game that has entered the starting device 436. A start switch 446 for detecting a ball, a non-specific passage switch 447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the right prize winning device 433, and a right prize winning device 433. Enter the specific passage switch 448 that detects the game ball that has entered the specified passage (not shown), the general prize switches 449A and 449B that detect the game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, and the general prize device 639, respectively. A general winning switch 649 or the like for detecting each of the game balls is installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area. Each winning device, specifically, the lower middle starting winning device 431, the right starting winning device 432, the upper middle starting winning device 632, the right grand winning device 433, the central winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B, 639. The entrance portion of the game ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is a collection / discharge passage formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401 (shown in FIG. 7). Will be guided to. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, a lower middle starting winning device 431 and an upper middle starting winning device 632) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the lower middle starting winning device 431 does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be used as an entrance where the game ball is released again into the game area without being paid out.

Each of the lower middle start winning device 431 related to the first special symbol, the upper middle starting winning device 632 related to the second special symbol, and the general winning device 439A, the general winning device 439B, and the general winning device 639 go to them. The approaching game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401 without changing the approach probability of the game ball. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. The mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It may be provided in any one or more of the starting device and the general winning device 439A, 439B, 639 according to the above. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or is represented by a mechanism that operates by the own weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism.

The right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right-entry regulation mechanism 452 and a right-entry regulation mechanism that change the probability of the game ball entering the inside of the right-starting winning device 432 by shifting between the entry-allowed posture and the entry-prohibited posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening). The game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432 by taking the arrangement, but when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game is played by taking the arrangement in which the movable piece guides the game ball into the entrance. The ball will be able to enter the right start winning device 432. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 enters right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the right-handed prize-winning device 433 has a right-entry restricting mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of a game ball into the inside of the entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture by shifting, and a right-entry restricting mechanism. By shifting between the right approach restricting solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the right grand prize device 433 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism are provided. When the right entry regulation mechanism 453 of the right grand prize device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the right grand prize device 433 because the right entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the right entry control mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball can enter the right grand prize device 433 by opening the entrance of the right entry control mechanism 453. In addition, the game ball that has entered the right grand prize device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guided posture immersed in the rear. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given an advantageous gaming state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the central prize-winning device 434 includes a central entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the central entry regulation. A central entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the central entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the game ball cannot enter the central grand prize device 434 because the central entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), but the central entry control mechanism 454. When is in the admissible posture, the central approach regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the central prize-winning device 434.

In addition, as the approach permissible posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning opening (or ball entry opening) of each device Corresponding to the change in posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

If the big hit lottery is won, the game ball can enter the right big prize device 433 and the central big prize device 434. Specifically, a lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the first starting winning switch 441 (hereinafter, also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"). ), Or the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 or the upper middle start winning device 632 related to the second special symbol is detected by the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 642. When a lottery based on the above (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the right entry control solenoid 463 and the center entry control solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the right approach control mechanism 453 and the central approach control mechanism 454 takes an entry allowance posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowed posture of the right approach restricting mechanism 453, and further switches to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting the conditions necessary for the right grand prize device 433 and the central grand prize device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the right big winning device 433 or the central big winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that either the right grand prize device 433 or the central grand prize device 434 start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of that. In addition, either the right grand prize device 433 or the central grand prize device 434 may start operating after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in a light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing judgment of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing judgment. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431 is detected by the first starting winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10). Even so, the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 is the second starting winning switch 442 or the second. 2 Even if it is detected by the start winning switch 642 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of hold times by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473 that displays the normal symbol in a variable manner or displays the normal symbol with a stop symbol according to the lottery result in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by a combination of the light emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be fixedly displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not necessarily start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Executes various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time reduction state"). handle.

The first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set to win a big hit with substantially the same probability. For example, a big hit is won with approximately 1/23. If a big hit is won in either the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery, either the right grand prize device 433 or the central grand prize device 434 starts to operate, and the player goes to the winning opening. A special game state occurs in which it is easy to win a prize ball by winning a prize. The number of prize balls that can be obtained by one big hit is set differently depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery is won. For example, if you win the first special symbol lottery, you can get a certain prize ball (for example, about 150 pieces) with a probability of about 77%, and you can get a prize ball without winning a prize with a probability of remaining 23%. Can not. If you win the 2nd special symbol lottery, it is set to be easier to win more prize balls than the 1st special symbol lottery, and there is a 25% chance that you will win a large number of prize balls (for example, about 250). It is possible to obtain a small number of prize balls (for example, about 150) with a probability of remaining 75%.

In addition, when a big hit is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game shifts to the time-saving game state with a preset probability. The probability of shifting to the time-saving gaming state is set differently depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery is won, and is set differently depending on the gaming state in which the winning occurs. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the game shifts to the time-saving game state at approximately 30% if it is won during the normal game state and 100% if it is during the time-saving game state, and the second special symbol lottery is won. In this case, it is set so that the player can easily shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player from winning the first special symbol lottery, and shifts to a time-saving gaming state at 100% regardless of the gaming state.

The time-saving game state is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time-saving state, and the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The winning probability is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "low probability state"). In addition, the time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, once or 87 times), but then returns to the normal game state. .. The conditions for the total number of unit games in which the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of time-saving games) differ depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery is won, and winning occurs. The settings are different depending on the playing state. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is won, if the winning is in the normal gaming state, one time saving number is selected with a probability of about 70%, and one time saving number is selected with a probability of about 30%. Will be done. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery is won during the time-saving game state, and when the second special symbol lottery is won during the normal game state and the time-saving game state, the first special symbol lottery is performed during the normal game state. It is set so that a longer time saving number can be easily selected than in the case of winning, and 87 time saving times are selected with a 100% probability. The details of the setting related to the transition control of the gaming state will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and the like.

In the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, a small hit lottery is also executed in addition to the big hit. If you do not win the big hit, you may win the small hit, and if you win the small hit, the right big winning device 433 operates for a short time (for example, about 0.1 seconds). Take an entry-allowed posture. Corresponds to whether or not the game ball enters a specific passage (a part of the passage provided inside the right prize winning device 433) during the period when the right prize winning device 433 is operating based on the winning of the small hit. Then, whether or not to give a gaming state advantageous to the player is different. For example, when a game ball enters a specific passage, the right grand prize device 433 starts operating again as an advantageous game state, and the approach allowed posture is set for a certain period of time (for example, about 1.8 seconds). Take. If a game ball enters a specific passage in the operation of the right grand prize device 433 from the second time onward after winning a small hit, the right to operate the right grand prize device 433 again is granted, and this operation is performed. Continue until a predetermined upper limit (for example, 3 times) is reached.

Here, the advantageous gaming state when the gaming ball enters the specific passage is not limited to the configuration by operating the right grand prize device 433 again, and instead of or in addition to it, another advantageous gaming. A state may be given. For example, a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as a "high probability state") in which the time is shortened and the probability of winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "high probability state"). (Also referred to as "probability variation game state"), and the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is maintained until a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time or 87 times). good.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming states and the gaming states does not necessarily have to have the above-mentioned configuration, and may be configured to further include a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states, depending on conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions. The configuration may be such that the game states are shifted.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variable pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various gaming states are generated. When the game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the first starting winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10), the starting winning of the first special symbol is obtained. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they are started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even if the player is not in the special game state, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved or the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. Is started after the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in the order of the start prize. It may be a configuration in which the unit superiority control according to the above is executed, or a configuration in which the two special symbols are not alternative and can be changed at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the jackpot, and for example, the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times that the right approach control mechanism 453 or the center approach control mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture (for example, 3 rounds, 4 rounds, and 5 rounds). Multiple types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state), and the jackpot type is set for each type. The design is set. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various fluctuation pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol is varied. The variable display according to a constant pattern is continued over the display time, and in the case of the decorative pattern, the variable display according to the variable display is continued over the variable display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the right entry control mechanism 453 of the right prize winning device 433 and the center entry control mechanism 454 of the central prize winning device 434 are in the entry allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the grand prize switches 443 and 444 during each approach allowable posture in the central approach restricting mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example). For example, when 29.5 seconds) elapses, one round ends, and the central entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, the central entry control mechanism 454 returns to the entry allowance posture again.

The right approach regulation mechanism 453 and the central approach regulation mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first entry allowed posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after that, a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 or the upper middle start winning device 632 related to the second special symbol is detected by the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 642. 2 It will be a start prize for a special symbol. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the game state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variation display according to a constant pattern for a predetermined variation display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when winning in a non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probability variation gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, about 2.4 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into two times) to enter the permissible posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is detected by the second start winning switch 442, the right approach regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery related to the right-starting winning device 432, first, the player must win in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball is in the entry allowed state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning. You must enter the right start winning device 432. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowed state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since (0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time (for example, approximately 2.4 seconds) in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery relating to the right start winning device 432 is performed in the normal gaming state. The opportunity per unit time that can be received is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time that the first special symbol lottery can be received. On the contrary, in the time-saving game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery related to the right start winning device 432 before the end of each game state.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with the central structure 420 in the central portion of the game area in which the game ball flows down, and the game ball is mainly placed on the right side of the central structure 420 within a range in which the game ball does not flow down. The configuration is such that a game method of flowing down (left-handed game method) and a game method of flowing down a game ball mainly via the right side of the central structure 420 (right-handed game method) can be selectively performed. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method, and in the short-time game state, the player plays the game by the right-handed game method. Further, the right grand prize device 433 and the central grand prize device 434 are arranged at positions where the game ball flowing down the right side of the central structure 420 can enter, and the game is played by the right-handed game method even in the special game state. ..

In addition, the upper middle start winning device 632 related to the second special symbol located above the central structure 420 can be entered by the game ball in a situation where the game ball is flowing down by the left-handed game method. .. The upper middle start winning device 632 is set to enter the game ball with a very low probability (for example, a probability of about 1/60) as compared with the lower middle starting winning device 431. The second special symbol lottery received by the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 is easier for the player to acquire the value (game value) for playing the game than the first special symbol lottery, and is a big hit. If you win, there is a high probability that you will shift to the time-saving game state, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special game state is also large. For this reason, not only is the expectation of a big hit by the first special symbol lottery to the lower middle start winning device 431 during the period of playing the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, but also the upper middle starting winning device that rarely occurs. When the second special symbol lottery is executed by the entry of the game ball into 632, it is possible to always expect a chance to acquire a large amount of game value.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. It also includes a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The substrate 501 is integrally molded with a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and a passage forming member 521 gradually increasing in height as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion at which the height is lowered and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height that overlaps vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is continuous downward while being curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. Further, a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a broken ball is attached to an intermediate portion of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The storage ball switch 591 detects a ball out state in which the game ball is not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to ball clogging or the like occurring on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various electric powers from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. By turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown), the pachinko machine can be used. A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are allowed to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the launching handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal sets the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900 and the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike this, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , It is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be able to perform information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like so as to be able to perform information output communication only in one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The variable counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting the interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 that sets an initial value in a stack pointer (a part of RAM area) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the output state determination process S1004 of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900, the value determination process S1005 of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and the storage. The information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not to erase the stored information in the RAM based on these determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the saved information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the RAM storage information is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 that initially sets various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the retained information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command are received. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game state at the time of the power failure is executed on the sub-control board 940. NS.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is set by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is set. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initialization process S1019).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start processing S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power failure, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. NS. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circular initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also provided except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first fluctuation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

The winning random number counters, jackpot symbol random number counters, stop pattern selection counters, and variable type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have the above-mentioned configurations, and at least a part of the above counters has other configurations. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as needed. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, the fraud detection information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a right approach restricting solenoid 463, a central approach restricting solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are used. The control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the first start winning switch 441, the second starting winning switch 442, 642, the right winning winning switch 443, the central winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, and the non-specific passage switch 447. , The signal state from each of the specific passage switch 448 and the general winning switch 449A, 449B, 649 is read, and the change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right starting winning device 432, the right winning device 433, and the central winning device 434 are moved to a compulsory approach-allowed posture, and the game ball is guided to a specific passage of the right winning device 433 by vibration. , Right start winning device 432 by radio waves, right grand prize device 433 and central grand prize device 434 forcible malfunction induction, induction of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, lower middle start winning device 431 , Right start prize device 432, upper middle start prize device 632, right grand prize device 433 and central grand prize device 434 with a high possibility of cheating such as guiding a game ball at an abnormal timing. Detect the occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the first start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the first start winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10), the middle start winning counter (a predetermined value of the RAM) is set. Area) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the second start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the second start winning switch 442, 642 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the right grand prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right grand prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the central grand prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the central prize-winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the prize-winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, the intermediate block with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is added by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize balls are continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes a control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the right big prize device The operation control of 433 and the central prize-winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the right big prize device The operation control of 433 and the central prize-winning device 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Change in the moving direction of the game ball made by the central structure 420>
Next, with reference mainly to FIGS. 13 to 16, a configuration in which the moving direction of the game ball flowing down the game area is changed by the central structure 420 will be described. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the central structure 420. More specifically, FIG. 13 shows a part of the members (top plate decoration 611, upper left front decoration) mounted on the upper part of the front side, which is the surface of the central structure 420 facing the player (that is, the front side). It is a perspective view which disassembled 612, the upper right front decoration 613) with respect to other members.

As shown in FIG. 13, the top plate decoration 611 includes a roof 611B protruding from a position inside the upper end on the back surface of the decoration main body 611A visually recognized by the player. The roof 611B is configured to have a smoothly curved shape that is convex upward and has an apex substantially at the center of the top plate decoration 611. The end of the roof 611B opposite to the joint with the decorative body 611A is in contact with the front of the central structure 420 on the main body side, whereby the roof 611B is the back surface of the decorative body 611A and the central structure 420. It is configured as a ball passage with the upper part open along with the front surface on the main body side.

Therefore, a part of the game balls launched from the launching device 330 and entering the upper gaming area (hereinafter, also referred to as “upper gaming area”) with respect to the central structure 420 flows down the upper gaming area and then the roof 611B. Can be reached. As described above, since the roof 611B is configured to have an upwardly convex curved shape, the game ball that has reached the roof 611B depends on the conditions such as the arrival position and the movement direction of the game ball at the time of arrival. It rolls on 611B in the left direction (arrow Q1 direction) or right direction (arrow Q2 direction).

Further, a recess 611C for guiding the game ball toward the main body side of the central structure 420 is provided at substantially the center (that is, substantially the top) of the roof 611B. A passage port 621 is provided at the tip of the recess 611C. As a result, the game ball that has reached the roof 611B can be guided to the passage port 621 through the recess 611C, in addition to being discharged from the left end or the right end of the roof 611B by rolling to the left or right. That is, the roof 611B functions as a distribution unit (first distribution unit) that distributes the game balls that have reached the roof 611B to the left or right or into the passage port 621.

In the upper right upper part of the central structure 420 on the main body side, a section portion 624 for partitioning a game area flowing down by the left-handed game method and a game area flowing down by the right-handed game method is provided. The compartment 624 has a plate shape having an inclined surface inclined to the lower right with a certain gap below which the game ball can pass with respect to the outer rail 402 (see FIG. 7) forming the outer shape of the game area. The game ball that is formed and passes through the upper side of the compartment 624 becomes a game ball that flows down by the right-handed game technique. On the other hand, the game ball passing through the lower side of the compartment 624 becomes a game ball that flows down by the left-handed game method.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down by the left-handed game method is only a game area continuous from the left side to the lower side with respect to the central structure 420 (hereinafter, also referred to as “left side game area”). Instead, it goes through the central upper gaming area located between the left gaming area and the upper gaming area. The central upper game area is an area including an internal area of the central structure 420, and corresponds to an area in which the game ball flows down the left and right sides of the roof 611B in the upper part of the central structure 420, and the upper middle start winning device 632 is provided. include. Therefore, the upper middle start winning device 632 is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the left gaming area. On the other hand, the lower middle start winning device 431 is provided in a part of the left game area and is arranged on the downstream side with respect to the central upper game area.

The movement paths of the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof 611B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. On the other hand, the game ball guided to the passage port 621 is guided to the distribution device 622 connected to the passage port 621. The distribution device 622 is a device that functions as a second distribution unit, and distributes the guided game ball to the outside of the upper middle start winning device 632 or the start winning device 632.

Below the distribution device 622, a flow control unit 623 is provided. The flow control unit 623 is configured as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward from right to left. Each end side of the inclined surface of the flow control portion 623 in the longitudinal direction is in contact with the back surface of each decoration 611, 612, 613 and the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side. As a result, the game ball distributed to the outside of the upper middle start winning device 632 by the distribution device 622 falls on the flow control unit 623 and moves to the left by its own weight on the inclined surface of the flow control unit 623 (arrow Q3 direction). ). As a result, the game ball enters the left game area (that is, the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420).

Here, the sorting device 622 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of the region E1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the distribution device 622 mainly includes a left distribution passage 622A, a right distribution passage 622B, and a stage 622C. The left distribution passage 622A is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered from the passage port 621 to the left side. On the other hand, the right distribution passage 622B is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered from the passage port 621 to the right side.

The stage 622C is provided on each downstream side of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B. As a result, when the game ball passes through the left distribution passage 622A, the game ball P enters from the left side of the stage 622C and rolls on the stage 622C, for example, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the right distribution passage 622B enters from the right side of the stage 622C and rolls on the stage 622C. Since contact sensors 662 (see FIG. 10) are installed on the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B, respectively, the game ball can enter the stage 622C from the contact sensor 662. It is detected based on the contact sensor signal of.

The stage 622C is provided with a recess 622D substantially in the center thereof. Recesses 622E and 622F are provided on the left and right sides of the recess 622D, respectively. Each of the recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F is configured so that the game ball can be dropped from the front side thereof (that is, the side that becomes the front side of the game machine). As a result, the game ball rolling on the stage 622C falls forward from the stage 622C through any of the recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F.

In front of the stage 622C, an upper middle start winning device 632 is provided. The upper middle start winning device 632 is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction by a driving device (not shown). Therefore, when the upper middle start winning device 632 that reciprocates at the timing when the game ball falls from the stage 622C through any of the recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F is in an appropriate position, the upper middle starting winning device 632 is set to the stage. Upon receiving the game ball falling from the 622C, the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632. As described above, the upper middle start winning device 632 is a starting winning device according to the second special symbol, like the right starting winning device 432. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 632 is detected by the second starting winning switch 642, the starting winning of the second special symbol is obtained.

On the other hand, if the upper middle start winning device 632 is not in an appropriate position and the game ball that has fallen from the stage 622C cannot enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the game ball is placed in the flow control unit 623 as described above. The game ball falls upward, whereby the game ball rolls to the left (in the direction of arrow Q3) on the inclined surface of the flow control unit 623 and is discharged to the left game area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the movement path of the game ball distributed to the left or right (direction of arrow Q1 or arrow Q2) by the roof 611B will be described. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the top plate decoration 611, the upper left front decoration 612, and the upper right front decoration 613 as viewed from the back side. FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional view of the central structure 420 due to the removal of the decorative bodies 611A, 612A, and 613A in the decorative bodies 611, 612, and 613. The decorative bodies 611A, 612A, and 613A are parts that function as decorative means visually recognized by the player in the top plate decoration 611, the upper left front decoration 612, and the upper right front decoration 613.

As shown in FIG. 15, passage walls 612B and 612C extending downward are erected on the back surface of the decorative main body 612A of the upper left front decorative 612, separated by a predetermined width. As a result, a left flow passage 652 continuous in the vertical direction is formed between the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C. That is, the left flow passage 652 functions as a warp path formed inside the central structure 420. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the roof 611B in the direction of arrow Q1 (that is, the game ball distributed to the left side by the roof 611B) is guided by the flow passage 652, which is a warp path, and flows down the left flow passage 652.

As shown in FIG. 16, a flow control section 623 is provided downstream of the left flow control passage 652. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left flow-down passage 652 falls on the flow-down control unit 623. As a result, the game ball rolls to the left (in the direction of arrow Q3) on the inclined surface of the flow control portion 623. That is, the game ball distributed to the left side by the roof 611B flows down the left flow-down passage 652, then rolls to the left on the inclined surface of the flow-down control portion 623, and is discharged to the left-side game area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, passage walls 613B and 613C extending downward are erected on the back surface of the decorative main body 613A of the upper right front decorative 613 separated by a predetermined width. As a result, a right flow passage 653 continuous in the vertical direction is formed between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C. That is, the right flow passage 653 also functions as a warp path formed inside the central structure 420. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the roof 611B in the direction of arrow Q2 (that is, the game ball distributed to the right by the roof 611B) is guided by the right flow passage 653, which is a warp path, and flows down the right flow passage 653. ..

Then, the game ball flowing down the right flow passage 653 falls on the flow control unit 623 and rolls in the left direction (arrow Q3 direction) on the inclined surface. That is, the game ball distributed to the right by the roof 611B flows down the right flow passage 653, then rolls to the left on the inclined surface of the flow control portion 623, and is discharged to the left game area.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B are allowed to enter the left game area by passing through the right flow passage 653 and the flow control unit 623. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the pachinko machine 100, between the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C, a plate-shaped protrusion 612D projecting from the back surface of the decorative main body 612A is provided between the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C. It is provided substantially parallel to the wall surface of.

The protrusion 612D has a bottom surface (a surface in contact with the back surface of the decorative main body 612A) formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending in the continuous direction (that is, the vertical direction) of the left flow passage 652, and is adjacent to the longitudinal side of the bottom surface. The side surface (that is, the surface substantially parallel to the wall surface of the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C) is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width becomes narrower as the distance from the back surface of the decorative main body 612A increases. In other words, the protrusion 612D is configured such that the height from the bottom surface, which is the installation surface with respect to the decorative main body 612A, gradually increases from the end portion in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface toward the inside. A plurality of protrusions 612D (five in the example shown in FIG. 15) are arranged side by side in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the left flow passage 652.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the left flow passage 652, a recess 652A corresponding to the shape of the protrusion 612D is formed on the surface facing the protrusion 612D. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left flow passage 652 is not a vertical drop, but a path formed by the protrusion 612D and the recess 652A, that is, once toward the back side (bottom side of the recess 652A) and then toward the front side. Take the route returned.

As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of protrusions 613D similar to the protrusions 612D are provided between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C on the back surface of the decoration main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613. Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in the right flow passage 653, a recess 653A corresponding to the shape of the protrusion 613D is formed on the surface facing the protrusion 613D. Therefore, also for the right flow passage 653, the game ball is formed by the protrusion 613D and the recess 653A, and once faces the back side (bottom side of the recess 653A), the game ball moves to the front side as in the case of the left flow passage 652. Follow the route returned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, on the back surface of the decorative main body 612A, a protrusion 612E extending in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the left flow passage 652 is formed on the downstream side of the left flow passage 652. .. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, on the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side, at a position downstream of the protrusion 612E, the direction intersecting the continuous direction of the left flow passage 652, similar to the protrusion 612E. A protrusion 652B extending elongatedly is formed on the surface. As a result, the game ball flows down the left flow passage 652 while colliding with the protrusions 612E and 652B. Since the mechanical energy of the game ball is reduced by the collision with the protrusions 612E and 652B, the collision between the game ball and the flow control unit 623 can be alleviated.

The curved shape of the roof 611B is configured to be substantially symmetrical for the purpose of smoothing the distribution of the game ball to the left and right. On the other hand, the inclined surface of the flow control portion 623 is configured to be inclined downward from right to left. Therefore, inevitably, the distance until the game ball discharged from the left end of the roof 611B and flowing down the left flow passage 652 reaches the flow control portion 623 is the distance from the right end of the roof 611B to the right flow passage 653 game ball. It is longer than the distance to reach the flow control section 623. Therefore, there is a difference in energy when the game ball falls (collides) with the flow control unit 623 depending on whether the game ball is discharged from the left end of the roof 611B or the game ball is discharged from the right end of the roof 611B. As a result, there is a risk that the behavior of the game ball that has fallen on the flow control unit 623 will be inhomogeneous.

On the other hand, as described above, protrusions 612E and 652B, which are not downstream of the right flow passage 653, are provided downstream of the left flow passage 652, which has a longer flow distance of the game ball than the right flow passage 653. Therefore, even when the game ball is distributed to either the left or right side of the roof 611B, the behavior of the game ball that has fallen to the flow control unit 623 can be smoothed.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the central structure 420, a stage 625 is provided below the opening 420A provided near the center of the central structure 420. A game ball that has passed through a left warp passage 628 (see FIG. 17) formed inside the left side of the central structure 420 enters the stage 625. Since the contact sensor 665 (see FIG. 10) is installed on the left warp passage 628, the entry of the game ball into the stage 625 is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 665. NS.

The stage 625 is provided with three recesses 625A, 625B, and 625C, and the game ball that has entered the stage 625 is distributed to any of these recesses 625A to 625C. When the game ball is distributed to the leftmost recess 625B or the rightmost recess 625C among the three recesses 625A to 625C, the game ball falls from the front of the stage 625 (front side of the game machine).

On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the central recess 625A enters the entrance 626 formed in the stage back cover 615 erected on the rear end side of the stage 625 (on the back side of the game machine). The game ball that has entered the entrance 626 passes through a passage (not shown) that communicates with the entrance 626 formed inside the central structure 420, and from the discharge port 627 formed under the stage 625. It is discharged. The function of the stage 625 will be described later.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the action and effect related to the change in the moving direction of the game ball made by the central structure 420 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B can enter the left game area by passing through the right flow-down passage 653 and the flow-down regulation unit 623.

In a typical conventional gaming machine, a game ball distributed to the right side by a distribution portion provided at the upper part of the central structure flows down to the right side as it is, and a game ball distributed to the left side flows down to the left side as it is. The behavior of the game balls distributed by the distribution section also affected the flow position of the game balls to the downstream side. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, when a starting winning device such as the lower middle starting winning device 431 is provided in the gaming area on the left side of the central structure (that is, the left gaming area), the player , Directly aim at the left game area (left-handed game method), or launch the game ball so that the game ball is distributed to the left side at the distribution section. In this way, in the conventional gaming machine, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and a large number of game balls flow down on one side where benefits related to the game are easily given, such as a start winning device. The launch operation of the player was easily limited, and it lacked unexpectedness.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100, even if the player shoots a game ball aiming at the right side far from the entrance of the game area (that is, the exit of the launch passage 401B), the game ball is placed in the left game area. Can be flowed down. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target position by the player by the firing operation, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Thereby, the interest of the game can be preferably improved.

Further, even if the launch operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the right side in the game area, the game balls can be returned to the left side game area by the right flow passage 653 and the flow control unit 623. , Even if many game balls are flowed down not only from the left side aiming at the entry of the game ball into the passage port 621 in the central structure 420 but also aiming at the entry into the passage port 621 from the right side, the game ball is in the left game area. By being guided to, it is possible to give benefits related to the game. In this respect as well, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to enter the upper middle start winning device 632 on condition that the game ball has entered the passage port 621 in the central structure 420. In other words, the game ball does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632 without entering the passage port 621. Therefore, when the game ball is launched so as to aim at entering the passage port 621 from the right side, the game ball does not enter the passage port 621 and the opportunity to enter the upper middle start winning device 632 is lost. However, since the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, there is a possibility of passing through the lower middle start winning device 431. As a result, the disappointment of the player due to the loss of the opportunity to enter the upper middle start winning device 632 can be reduced, and in that respect as well, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the central structure 420 is provided above the lower middle start winning device 431 in the front view of the pachinko machine 100 (see FIG. 7). As a result, the roof 611B of the top plate decoration 611 is positioned so as to overlap the lower middle start winning device 431 in the vertical direction. By passing and moving to the left side, the lower middle start winning device 431 is reached through a substantially S-shaped moving path. Therefore, the player can use the movement route of the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B because the movement route to reach the lower middle start winning device 431 is different from the simple flow route. I can be clearly aware of it. As a result, even if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the side away from the left game area (that is, the right side), the game ball may pass through the lower middle start winning device 431. Since the firing operation can be performed while clearly grasping, it is possible to preferably enjoy the game in which the firing operation is performed aiming at the right side.

Here, the decorative symbol display device 479 that displays the decorative symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the second special symbol. , In the front view of the pachinko machine 100, it is provided between the roof 611B and the lower middle start winning device 431. That is, the decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is displayed between the roof 611B and the lower middle start winning device 431. As a result, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the player follows the movement path of the game ball, and when the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431, the player looks at the game. By raising the ball upward from the position of the lower middle start winning device 431, a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery (that is, the first special symbol lottery) based on the game ball entering the lower middle starting winning device 431. Can be visually recognized. After confirming the state of the decorative pattern display device 479, the player can visually recognize the state in which the game balls are distributed on the roof 611B located above the decorative pattern display device 479 by further raising the line of sight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being distracted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the game ball enters the passage port 621 in the central structure 420, the game ball is guided to the stage 622C, and the stage 622C guides the game ball to the upper middle start winning device 632 or the starting winning device. It is distributed outside of 632. If the game ball has entered the passage port 621 but has not been distributed to the upper middle start winning device 632, the game ball falls on the flow control unit 623 and is discharged to the left game area. As a result, the player may be able to allow the game ball to enter the lower middle start winning device 431 in the left game area even if the game ball cannot enter the upper middle start winning device 632. You can expect it to happen.

In particular, even when the game ball falls from the recess (recess 622D or recess 622F) on the right side with respect to the position of the upper middle start winning device 632 that reciprocates in the left-right direction, the game ball is placed in the left game area. Since the player can be guided, the player may be surprised at the movement path of the game ball, and the game ball may enter the lower middle start winning device 431 for the game ball moving by the unexpected route. You can expect that there isn't.

Further, in a conventional typical game machine, when a game ball that has entered an approach portion such as a passage port 621 does not pass through an advantageous area such as the upper middle start winning device 632, the game ball is a pachinko machine. It was discharged to the outside of 100. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the game ball that has entered the passage port 621 does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Again, a chance to enter the lower middle start winning device 431 is given. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the game ball that has entered the passage port 621 does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632, and in that respect as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

<Behavior of the game ball according to the drop position on the flow control unit 623>
Next, with reference mainly to FIG. 17, the behavior of the game ball according to the drop position to the flow control unit 623 will be described. FIG. 17 is a front view of a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. Note that FIG. 17 also shows the general winning device 639 arranged in the left game area (that is, the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420).

As described above, the game balls distributed to the left or right by the roof 611B flow down the left flow passage 652 or the right flow passage 653, and then move to the left on the inclined surface of the flow control unit 623 (arrow Q3 direction: FIG. 16) and is discharged to the left game area. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, the flow control portion 623 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface provided on the upper surface thereof is longer than the width in the left-right direction of the roof 611B. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B (that is, when the game ball flows down the left flow passage 652) and when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B (that is, the game ball is distributed to the left). The drop position of the game ball to the flow control unit 623 is different between the case of flowing down the flow passage 652).

Specifically, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B, the side near the exit 623A, which is the left end of the flow control unit 623, is the drop position of the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the side far from the exit 623A (that is, the side closer to the right end of the flow control portion 623) is the drop position of the game ball.

Since the inclined surface of the flow control portion 623 is configured to incline downward from right to left, the height (vertical length) with respect to the position of the outlet 623A increases as the distance from the outlet 623A (that is, the left end of the inclined surface) increases. It gets higher. Therefore, the farther the drop position of the game ball from the flow control unit 623 is from the position of the outlet 623A of the flow control unit 623, the higher the height of the drop position with respect to the outlet 623A.

That is, the height of the drop position with respect to the exit 623A differs depending on the direction in which the game ball is distributed by the roof 611B. For example, the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B falls to a higher position with respect to the exit 623A as compared with the case where the game ball is distributed to the left side. Therefore, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow control unit 623 can be changed according to the distribution direction of the game ball by the roof 611B.

Specifically, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B and flows down the left flow-down passage 652, the drop point to the flow-down control portion 623 is closer to the exit 623A, and the height with respect to the exit 623A is relatively high. Low. Therefore, the acceleration of the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A in such a case tends to be relatively small. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B and flows down the right flow-down passage 653, the drop point to the flow-down control portion 623 is on the side far from the exit 623A, and the height with respect to the exit 623A is relatively high. high. Therefore, in such a case, the acceleration of the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A tends to be relatively large.

Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B, the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow control unit 623 can easily take the trajectory J1 that flows down on the side closer to the central structure 420. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow control unit 623 flows down on the side farther from the central structure 420 (that is, the side farther than the trajectory J1). It is easy to take the orbit J2.

The game ball discharged from the exit 623A of the flow control unit 623 enters the left game area. A general winning device 639 is arranged above the left game area (see FIG. 7). More specifically, the general winning device 639 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the exit 623A near the exit 623A of the flow control unit 623 in the left game area.

By arranging the general winning device 639 at a position slightly to the left of the exit 623A, the possibility that the game ball discharged from the flow control unit 623 will enter the general winning device 639 has passed through the trajectory J2. In some cases, it will be higher than when it passes through the orbit J1. Therefore, the farther the drop point to the flow control unit 623 is from the exit 623A, the higher the possibility that the game ball will enter the general winning device 639. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the possibility of entering the general winning device 639 is higher when the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B.

Further, on the left side of the central structure 420, an opening 628A serving as an entrance of the left warp passage 628 is provided. The game ball that has entered through the opening 628A passes through the left warp passage 628 formed inside the central structure 420 and enters the stage 625. As described above, the game ball that has entered the stage 625 rolls on the stage 625 and is distributed to any of the recesses 625A to 625C (see FIG. 16). At this time, when the game ball is distributed to the central recess 625A, the game ball enters the entrance 626 and is discharged from the discharge port 627.

Since the discharge port 627 is located directly above the lower middle start winning device 431 (see FIG. 7), the game ball discharged from the discharge port 627 enters the lower middle start winning device 431 with a high probability. That is, the game ball distributed to the recess 625A by the stage 625 easily enters the lower middle start winning device 431 located directly below the discharge port 620. That is, when the game ball flowing down the left game area enters the opening 628A, there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the lower middle start winning device 431.

Since the opening 628A is provided on the left side of the central structure 420, the possibility that the game ball discharged from the flow control unit 623 enters the opening 628A is different from the case of the general winning device 639 described above. When passing through the orbit J1 passing closer to the central structure 420, the height is higher than when passing through the orbit J2. Therefore, the closer the drop point to the flow control unit 623 is from the exit 623A, the higher the possibility that the game ball will enter the opening 628A. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the possibility of entering the opening 628A is higher when the game balls are distributed to the left side by the roof 611B.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the action and effect related to the behavior of the game ball according to the drop position to the flow control unit 623 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, the flow control unit 623 is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit 623 to the left game area differs depending on the position where the game ball is received. For example, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged to the left game area differs depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the right side or the left side by the roof 611B. On the other hand, the general winning device 639 is provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit 623. The opening 628A, which is the entrance of the left warp passage 628, is also provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit 623, as in the general winning device 639. Thereby, the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed according to the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit 623.

In general, the entry of the game ball into the advantageous area such as the general winning device 639 is easily determined by the arrangement of the flow changing member such as a nail provided in the vicinity of the advantageous area, and the game ball at a position away from the advantageous area. Behavior has little effect on entry into the advantageous zone. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is only interested in the behavior of the game ball in a part of the game area, but in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the game ball received by the flow control unit 623. Depending on the position of the player, the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed, so that the player can enjoy the game of moving the game ball at the flow control unit 623, thereby. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game. Further, since the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed according to the distribution direction of the game balls by the roof 611B, the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the general winning device 639 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the exit 623A of the flow control unit 623. That is, the possibility of entering the general winning device 639 is higher when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in launching the game ball aiming at a predetermined position such as a position where the roof 611B distributes the game ball to the right side.

Further, the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B and a part of the game ball distributed by the stage 622C both pass through the flow control unit 623. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B may pass through the trajectory J2, but may be blocked by the game ball distributed by the stage 622C. Since the timing at which the game ball is ejected from the stage 622C fluctuates and is difficult to predict, even if the player aims at the progress of the game ball by the trajectory J2, the progress of a part of the game ball is ejected from the stage 622C. A situation occurs where the ball blocks you. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right side portion of the central upper game area from being extremely advantageous as compared with the left side portion.

<Functions of protrusions 612D and 613D>
Next, the functions of the protrusions 612D and 613D will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is a front view of the central structure 420. As shown in FIG. 18, the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the central structure 420 on the front surface side.

In the upper left front decoration 612, the decoration main body 612A whose front side is visible to the player is made of a material whose surface is transparent or translucent and which can transmit light. A light emitting body is arranged as a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) on the back surface side of the decorative main body 612A, and by causing the light emitting body to emit light, the light transmitted to the front surface side of the decorative main body 612A causes the game board 400 to emit light. decorate. That is, the upper left front decoration 612 has a function as a decorative means for decorating the game board 400.

On the other hand, the decorative main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613 is also configured as a hollow body having a transparent or translucent surface and a material capable of transmitting light, like the decorative main body 612A. Therefore, the upper right front decoration 613 also functions as a decorative means for decorating the game board 400, like the upper left front decoration 612.

In particular, since the surfaces of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces (decorative undulating surfaces) on the side facing the player (that is, the front side), the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613 are used. The decoration function is enhanced.

The back surface of each of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A is also made of a transparent or translucent and light-transmitting material like the front surface. Therefore, when the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613 are viewed from the front side, the player can visually recognize the back side (that is, the back side on the back side of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A).

As described above, since the flow passages 652 and 653 are provided on the back sides of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A (see FIGS. 15 and 16), the player can use the warp path via the decorative bodies 612A and 613A. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the flow-down passages 652 and 653 arranged in the central structure 420. Therefore, the player can grasp how the game ball distributed to either the right side or the left side by the roof 611B moves on the warp path by visually recognizing it through the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A.

However, as described above, each of the front decorations 612 and 613 has a function as a decoration means and emits light as needed, so that the light deteriorates the visibility of the back sides of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A. , It becomes difficult for the player to identify the positions of the flow passages 652 and 653. Along with this, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the whereabouts of the game balls distributed by the roof 611B. In particular, since the surfaces of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, the emitted light is scattered on the undulating surfaces, and the visibility of the back sides of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A is significantly deteriorated.

On the other hand, on each of the back surfaces of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A (more specifically, the back side of each back surface), protrusions 612D and 613D extending in the continuous direction of the flow passages 652 and 653 in each flow passage 652 and 653. Is provided (see FIG. 15). Therefore, the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A are less likely to transmit light in the portion where the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided than in the other portions. The decorative bodies 612A and 613A emit light by a light emitting body provided on the back surface side thereof, and since the thickness of the protrusions 612D and 613D in the front-rear direction is larger than that of other parts, it is difficult for light to pass through. This is because the rear surface of the protrusions 612D and 613D is inclined in the front-rear direction, so that it is difficult for light from the rear side to enter the inside of the protrusions 612D and 613D. Therefore, even when the front decorations 612 and 613 emit light, the player can visually recognize the portion where the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided as a dark portion as compared with the other portions.

As described above, the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D (the surfaces of the decorative body 612A in contact with the back surface of the 613A) are formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending in the continuous direction of each flow passage 652,653. The dark part is visually recognized as a streak extending in the continuous direction of each of the flow passages 652 and 653. Therefore, the player can identify the positions of the flow passages 652 and 653 based on the dark portion. In this way, the protrusions 612D and 613D function as passage display means for displaying the flow passages 652 and 653.

In particular, as described above, the surfaces of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, which enhances the decorative effect by light while deteriorating the visibility of the back sides of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A, but on the back side. Is provided with protrusions 612D and 613D that function as passage display means for displaying the flow passages 652 and 653, so that the warp path formed on the back side while performing a high degree of decorativeness that gives the player an interest. Good visibility of the flow passages 652,653) can be ensured.

Further, since a plurality of protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of each of the flow passages 652 and 653, the player can visually recognize the plurality of streaks as dark portions and flow down. It is easy to identify the positions of the passages 652 and 653.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating the shape of the flow passage. More specifically, FIG. 19 is a view in which a portion of the right flow passage 653 is extracted in the cross-sectional view taken along the line XA-XA of FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, the right flow passage 653 is configured as a meandering path by the protrusion 613D and the recess 653A formed on the surface facing the protrusion 613D.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the right flow passage 653 flows down by a meandering path to the back side of the central structure 420 (that is, the bottom side of the recess 652A) instead of vertically falling. By meandering and flowing down the game ball, the game ball flows down while colliding with the right flow-down passage 653, whereby the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced. That is, the protrusion 613D has a function as a deceleration means. The left flow passage 652 is also configured as a meandering path similar to that in FIG. Therefore, the protrusion 612D also functions as a deceleration means similar to the protrusion 613D.

FIG. 20 is an enlarged view of the region E2 in FIG. The right-hand flow passage 653 has a passage width W1 in the left-right direction, that is, a distance between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C is a distance at which two game balls can pass at the same time. By adopting such a width, it is possible to suppress ball clogging in the right flow passage 653.

On the other hand, in the right flow passage 653, the width of each section partitioned by the protrusion 613D (the length in the direction intersecting the continuous direction of the right flow passage 653) W2 is the diameter of the game ball (width of the game ball). It is said to be a narrower distance. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right flow passage 653 is rectified by the adjacent protrusion 613D. That is, the protrusion 613D has a function as a rectifying means.

In this way, since the flowing game balls are rectified by the protrusion 613D, even in a situation where two game balls pass through the right flow passage 653 at almost the same time, it is possible to suppress the ball clogging caused by those game balls. can. The left flow passage 652 is also configured in the same manner as in FIG. Therefore, the protrusion 612D also functions as a rectifying means similar to the protrusion 613D.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the actions and effects related to the arrangement of the protrusions 612D and 613D will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, protrusions 612D and 613D that function as passage display means are provided on the back surfaces of the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A, so that the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A decorate the game board 400 by light emission. Even if it is, it is easy to grasp the existence of the left and right flow passages 652 and 653 before the start of the game (that is, before the game ball enters the left game area including the lower middle start winning device 431). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust or irritation of the game ball that has entered the game ball passage, so that the player can enjoy the game that is started by entering the game ball into the game ball passage. Can be done. This makes it possible to suitably improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the left and right flow passages 652 and 653 are passages through which the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof 611B are passed, and a flow regulation unit 623 is provided downstream of each of the flow passages 652 and 653. The game ball that has passed through the flow passages 652 and 653 rolls on the flow control unit 623 and is discharged to the left game area. At this time, the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B passes through the right flow-down passage 653 and then rolls from the side closer to the right end of the flow-down regulation portion 623 to the exit 623A. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, it passes through a relatively long route before entering the left game area. In the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the existence of the right-hand flow passage 653 can be easily grasped before the start of the game, so that the player feels distrust of the game ball that has entered the relatively long route. Can be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the protrusions 612D and 613D function as deceleration means in the meandering portion formed together with the recess 652A, while the protrusions 612D and 613D function as rectifying means. Clogged balls can be suppressed.

<Stage 622C, 625>
Next, two stages 622C and 625 provided in the central structure 420 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating the upper and lower stages 622C and 625. More specifically, FIG. 21 is a front view of the game board 400 in which a partial configuration is omitted.

In FIG. 21, the shape of the front view of the gaming machine on each of the rolling surfaces of the stages 622C and 625 is shown by a thick line. Further, in FIG. 21, the positions of the flow control section 623 and the left warp passage 628 are shown by broken lines, and the above-mentioned trajectories J1 and J2 that can be taken by the game ball discharged from the flow control section 623 are also shown.

The stage 622C is provided above the decorative symbol display device 479 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In the stage 622C, the rolling surface on which the gaming ball rolls has a wavy streamline shape extending in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage 622C is mainly composed of a convex surface formed to be convex upward near the center and a concave surface formed to be concave downward to the left and right of the convex surface. NS. The uneven surface is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the substantially center of the convex surface. Further, the left and right ends of the rolling surface of the stage 622C are above the top of the convex surface. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the stage 622C is reciprocated from side to side.

The stage 625 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 479 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. That is, the stage 622C and the stage 625 are arranged vertically with the decorative symbol display device 479 interposed therebetween.

In the lower stage 625, the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls has a wavy streamline shape extending in the left-right direction in the front view of the game machine, similar to the stage 622C. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage 625 is mainly composed of a convex surface formed to be convex upward near the center and a concave surface formed to be concave downward to the left and right of the convex surface. NS. The uneven surface is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the substantially center of the convex surface. Further, the left and right ends of the rolling surface of the stage 625 are above the top of the convex surface. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the stage 625 is reciprocated from side to side.

Since each of the rolling surfaces of the stages 622C and 625 mainly includes an uneven surface composed of a convex surface and concave surfaces formed on the left and right sides of the convex surface, any of the game balls that have entered the stages 622C and 625 , It rolls left and right on each rolling surface while moving up and down in the front view of the gaming machine on a smooth trajectory along the convex and concave surfaces. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the upper stage 622C and the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the lower stage 625 are different. They are similar to each other.

A recess 622D (see FIG. 14) is provided at the top of the convex surface on the rolling surface of the upper stage 622C. On the other hand, a recess 622E (see FIG. 14) is provided at the bottom of the concave surface on the left side. Further, a recess 622F (see FIG. 14) is provided at the bottom of the concave surface on the right side.

Each of these recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F has a shape that inclines downward toward the front (front side of the gaming machine), whereby the gaming ball that has entered the stage 622C has three recesses 622D, 622E. , 622F, the game ball is guided forward along the respective recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F, and falls from the front of the stage 622C regardless of which recess is distributed.

As described above, the upper middle start winning device 632 provided in front of the stage 622C is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the front of the stage 622C through any of the recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F is subject to the upper middle start winning device 632 being in an appropriate position at the time of the fall. Enter 632.

On the other hand, a recess 625A (see FIG. 16) is provided on the top of the convex surface on the rolling surface of the lower stage 625. On the other hand, a recess 625B (see FIG. 16) is provided at the bottom of the concave surface on the left side. Further, a recess 625C (see FIG. 16) is provided at the bottom of the concave surface on the right side.

Of these recesses 625A, 625B, and 625C, the left and right recesses 625B and 625C are shaped so as to incline downward toward the front (front side of the gaming machine), whereby the gaming ball that has entered the stage 625 can be inserted into the recesses 625A, 625B, and 625C. When the ball is distributed to the recesses 625B and 625C, the game ball is guided forward along the recesses 625B and 625C and falls from the front of the stage 625.

On the other hand, the central recess 625A has a shape that inclines downward toward the rear (back side of the gaming machine), and the game ball distributed to the recess 624A is guided backward and is guided to the rear side of the recess 624A on the back side of the gaming machine. Enter the entrance 626, which is connected to the end of the slingshot. The game ball that has entered the entrance 626 is discharged from the discharge port 627 located on the upstream side of the lower middle start winning device 431.

The game ball distributed to the recess 625A in the stage 625 enters the lower middle start winning device 431 located on the downstream side of the discharge port 620 with a high probability. On the other hand, since the other recesses (that is, the recesses 625B and 625C) are located at positions deviated from the lower middle start winning device 431 in the left-right direction, the game balls distributed to the recesses 625B and 625C are below. It is difficult to enter the side middle start winning device 431.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the actions and effects related to the shapes of the stages 622C and 625 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, two stages 622C and 625 that can distribute game balls toward each of the upper middle start winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431 are provided. As a result, the player can enjoy the playability of the distribution by the stage 622C or the stage 625 for both the upper middle start winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431, respectively, and thus the interest of the game is suitably improved. It becomes possible.

In particular, since these stages 622C and 625 have rolling surfaces configured to have a similar shape with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, the rolling behavior of the game ball on the rolling surface is both stages. It becomes similar in 622C and 625. As a result, the player can visually enjoy the distribution of the game balls according to the stages 622C and 625.

Both the stage 622C and the stage 625 are configured to have a wavy streamline shape in which the rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine. The stages 622C and stage 625 having such a shape are provided vertically via the decorative symbol display device 479 formed in the substantially center of the game area, so that the game ball can flow down in the left-right direction of the decorative symbol display device 479. It is possible to secure a game area with a suitable size.

At this time, since the left warp passage 628 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 479, the game ball flowing down the left game area passes through the left warp passage 628, and the decorative symbol display device 479. It is guided to the stage 625 provided below. Therefore, the game area around the decorative symbol display device 479 can be effectively utilized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the game ball does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632 as a result of distribution by the stage 622C, in that case, the game ball passes through the flow control unit 623 to play the left side game. Released into the area. At this time, for example, when the game ball released from the flow control unit 623 flows down on the orbit J1 that flows down on the side closer to the orbit J2 with respect to the central structure 420, the game ball flows down on the left warp passage 628. There is a possibility of being guided to stage 625 by entering.

As described above, even if the game ball does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632 as a result of the distribution by the stage 622C, there is a path for guiding the game ball to the stage 625, so that the player can use the lower side. The chance to enter the middle start winning device 431 (the chance to make the first special symbol lottery) is given again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player that the game ball distributed by the stage 622C does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632 and the second special symbol lottery is not performed.

Further, when the game balls distributed by the stage 622C are distributed again at the stage 625, the rolling behaviors in both stages 622C and 625 are similar, so that the player can perform the stage from the rolling behaviors similar to each other. At 625, it can be intuitively recognized that the distribution that may obtain the special symbol lottery is performed in the same manner as the distribution by the stage 622C. Therefore, in that respect as well, it is possible to make the player feel that the special symbol lottery (more specifically, the first special symbol lottery) has been given another chance.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 have the rolling surfaces having similar shapes with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, while the recesses 622D and 625A formed in the center. (See FIG. 16), the game balls are configured to have different discharge directions. Thereby, the difference between the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 can be distinguished by the difference in the discharging direction of the game balls discharged from the recesses 622D and 625A. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the monotony of the game that may be felt by the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the lower middle start winning device 431 is fixedly provided, while the upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction. Therefore, the probability that the game ball distributed by the upper stage 622C will enter the upper middle start winning device 632 is higher than the probability that the game ball distributed by the lower stage 625 will enter the lower middle starting winning device 431. Will be low. In this respect as well, it is possible to avoid the monotony of the game that may be felt by the similar rolling behavior of the game balls between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632, the value is higher than when the game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431 (game). Value) can be expected. That is, the expected value differs between the case where the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 and the case where the game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to avoid the monotony of the game that may be felt by the similar rolling behavior of the game balls between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

<Movable body 710>
Next, the movable body 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400. As shown in FIG. 22, a storage case 701 is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 401. The storage case 701 accommodates various display devices such as a decorative pattern display device 479 and a movable body 710 described later. Further, the storage case 701 is formed with a collection / discharge passage for collecting the game balls discharged from the game area.

The movable body 710 is arranged in the storage case 700 on the side closer to the central structure 420 than the decorative symbol display device 479. That is, the movable body 710 is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 497 and the central structure 420. The movable body 710 is connected to a movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) composed of a motor or the like. The movable body driving device 721 operates under the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), whereby the movable body 710 operates in the vertical direction in the front view of the gaming machine.

The movable body 710 has an initial position at a predetermined position below the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine (see FIG. 24). That is, the movable body 710 at the initial position does not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 479. Then, when various operating conditions described later are satisfied, the movable body 710 is moved to each position above the initial position. Therefore, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the player visually recognizes the movable body 710 at a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

FIG. 23 is a front view of the movable body 710. In the present embodiment, the movable body 710 is configured to have the appearance of a whale character, and various shapes can be adopted as the appearance. The movable body 710 is mainly composed of a main body 711 and a decorative symbol display device 779 provided on the front side of the gaming machine in the main body 711. The decorative design display device 779 is configured as a plurality of circular light emitting units 779A arranged in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine.

Each light emitting unit 779A includes a light emitting body such as an LED, and by individually controlling the light emission of each light emitting body, it is possible to individually light a plurality of light emitting units 779A. Of the plurality of light emitting units 779A, the central light emitting unit 779A is larger than the other light emitting units 779A and is brilliantly decorated. On the surface of the light emitting portion 779A in the center, the character "win" 779B indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit is fixedly formed.

The decorative symbol display device 779 is a unit game related to the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 or the entry of the game ball into the lower middle starting winning device 431 under predetermined conditions. Alternatively, it is a device that displays fluctuations and confirmations in a unit game related to a second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the right-start winning device 432.

Specifically, the decorative design display device 779 defines a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, a lighting pattern in which the light emitting unit 779A that emits light is moved one by one from left to right, or all the light emitting units 779A). The variable display is performed by lighting with the lighting pattern) that lights according to the rhythm of.

Then, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display, a stop display is performed by lighting the light emitting unit 779A in the center, so that a definite display indicating the big hit is performed. Since the character 779B is formed on the surface of the central light emitting unit 779A, the player can tell that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery was a big hit against the stop display at the central light emitting unit 779A. recognize. On the other hand, in other cases, the stop display is performed by lighting the light emitting unit 779A other than the center, so that a definite display indicating that it is not a big hit is performed.

The lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units 779A may be different depending on the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, a lighting pattern in which all the light emitting units 779A are lit in accordance with a predetermined rhythm (for example, 3, 3, 7 beats) is compared with a lighting pattern in which the light emitting unit 779A is moved one by one from left to right. It may be a lighting pattern showing a high degree of expectation. Further, the specific lighting pattern may indicate the confirmation of the big hit.

24 to 27 are views showing the case where the movable body 710 is arranged at various positions. In addition, in FIGS. 24 to 27, a part of the game board 400, more specifically, the peripheral area of the decorative symbol display device 479 is extracted and displayed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position. The movable body 710 is normally arranged at the initial position shown in FIG. 24. Specifically, the initial position is the position where the movable body 710 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine. Since most of the stage back cover 615 of the central structure 420 is transparent (light transmitting), the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position can visually recognize a part of the stage back cover 615 through the stage back cover 615. can.

An enlarged view of the area E3 is shown in the lower part of FIG. 24. When the movable body 710 is arranged in the initial position, when the passage connected to the discharge port 627 and extending in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is visually recognized from the discharge port 627, the central light emitting portion in the decorative symbol display device 779. A part of the character "this" 779B (see FIG. 23) formed on the 779A is visually recognized. That is, the discharge port 627 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, the passage connected to the discharge port 627 is transparently configured, and the periphery of the discharge port 627 is opaque (light opaque). When the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, a part of the character 779B of "this" is visually recognized, not the whole, through the discharge port 627.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position. The movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position shown in FIG. 25 when the variable display and the definite display are performed by the decorative symbol display device 779. The variable display position is a position where the movable body 710 overlaps most of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine, and the decorative symbol display device 779 is exposed above the stage back cover 615. The variation display by the decorative symbol display device 779 is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 or the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 432 under a predetermined condition.

The operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled at the timing when the variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779 is started, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward (that is, rises) from the initial position and is arranged at the variable display position. At this time, the movement pattern of the movable body 710 that rises to the variable display position may be different depending on the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the movement pattern in which the movable body 710 rises while swinging from side to side may be a movement pattern showing a higher degree of expectation than the movement pattern in which the movable body 710 rises linearly.

The movable body 710 arranged in the variable display position is brought into the gaming state at that time, such as the initial position or the intermediate position described later, at a predetermined timing for releasing the arrangement, such as after the confirmation display is executed by the decorative symbol display device 779. It is moved to the corresponding position.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at an intermediate position. The intermediate position is a position between the initial position (see FIG. 24) and the variable display position (see FIG. 25). Therefore, the area where the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 479 is smaller than the area where the movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 479.

When the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward from the initial position and is arranged at the intermediate position. In the present embodiment, when the contact sensor 662 (see FIG. 10) provided on the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B of the distribution device 622 detects the passage of the game ball, It is assumed that the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632.

The movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position has its initial position, variable display position, etc. at a predetermined timing for releasing the arrangement, such as after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after moving to the intermediate position. It is moved to a position according to the game state at that time.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position. The movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position shown in FIG. 27 when the game ball enters the lower stage 625. The irradiation position is a position where the decorative symbol display device 779 of the movable body 710 can illuminate the rolling surface of the stage 625. Since the plurality of light emitting units 779A in the decorative pattern display device 779 are arranged substantially along the shape of the front view of the gaming machine on the rolling surface of the stage 625, by arranging the movable body 710 at the irradiation position, the stage 625 It is possible to preferably illuminate the rolling surface of the.

When the game balls are distributed by the stage 625, the operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward from the initial position and is arranged at the irradiation position. In the present embodiment, when the contact sensor 665 (see FIG. 10) provided on the passage near the exit of the left warp passage 628 detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball is sorted by the stage 625. Suppose you are

The movable body 710 arranged at the irradiation position is positioned according to the game state at that time, such as the initial position or the variable display position, at a predetermined timing for releasing the arrangement such as the completion of the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625. Moved to.

An enlarged view of the area E4 is shown in the lower part of FIG. 27. When the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position, when the passage connected to the entrance 626 and extending in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is viewed from the entrance 626, the central light emitting unit in the decorative symbol display device 779 is visually recognized. A part of the character "this" 779B (see FIG. 23) formed on the 779A is visually recognized.

That is, the entrance 626 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, the passage connected to the entrance 626 is transparently configured, and the area 615A (hatched diagonal line) formed around the entrance 626 in the stage back cover 615. Since the region (indicated by) is opaque, the player can see that when the movable body 710 is placed at the irradiation position, the movable body 710 is not the entire character 779B of "this" through the discharge port 627. You will see a part of it. In particular, in the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes the upper part of the character 779B of "this" as if it were a downward arrow (that is, "↓") through the entrance 626. Become.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the actions and effects related to the operation of the movable body 710 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the movable body 710 moves upward from the initial position (see FIG. 24), so that the player can move the movable body. From the movement direction of 710 (upward in this embodiment), the occurrence of the inaccessibility can be recognized.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632, the player can obtain a chance to acquire a large amount of game value. However, since the upper middle start winning device 632 is set to have a lower probability of the game ball entering than the lower middle starting winning device 431, the player's line of sight is that the lower middle starting winning device is easy to enter. There arises a situation in which it is easy for the player to face the device 431 and the player easily misses the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632. In particular, since the decorative symbol display device 479 is interposed between the upper middle start winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431, the player's awareness of the upper middle starting winning device 632, which has a low probability of entering, is high. It becomes even easier to fade.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can recognize the occurrence of the possibility of entry from the moving direction of the movable body 710, so that the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632. (That is, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking (that is, the establishment of the starting condition for the second special symbol lottery). That is, the player can easily witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632. As a result, it is possible to preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the game ball is inserted into the upper middle start winning device 632.

Further, when the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632, a higher value (game value) can be expected as compared with the case where the game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431. Also, by making it easier to witness the passage of the game ball through the upper middle start winning device 632, it is possible to preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632.

Since the movable body 710 on which the decorative symbol display device 779 is arranged is diverted as a part that suggests that the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, it is dedicated to suggest it. It is not necessary to provide the parts of the above, and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, in the moving direction of the movable body 710 when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the movable body 710 starts from the initial position and uses the decorative symbol display device 779 to display the second special symbol. Since the direction is toward the position (that is, the variable display position shown in FIG. 25) at which the variable display and the final display of the unit game related to the above-mentioned are performed, the player can move the movable body 710 upward by the second special symbol lottery. It can be intuitively recognized that it is related to the establishment of the starting condition for the above (that is, the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632).

In particular, since the moving direction of the movable body 710 in such a case is the side where the upper middle start winning device 632 is located (that is, upward), the player's line of sight is matched with the movement of the movable body 710 to match the upper middle starting winning device. It can be turned naturally to 632. As a result, the player can witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 with a suitable probability.

Further, when the game ball passing through the left distribution passage 622A or the right distribution passage 622B of the distribution device 622 is detected by the contact sensor 662, the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632. As a result, since the movable body 710 is moved, the player should pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the stage 622C (distribution device 622), which is related to whether or not the game balls pass through the upper middle start winning device 632. Can be done. As a result, the player can entertain the game in which the game balls are distributed by the stage 622C.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the movable body 710 is positioned at an intermediate position (see FIG. 26) different from the variable display position, so that the movable body 710 is movable. Depending on the position of the body 710, the movable body 710 was moved based on the occurrence of the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632, or to perform a variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779. It is possible to make the player distinguish what was done. Therefore, the player can suitably recognize the occurrence of the possibility of entry.

Such an intermediate position is a position where the movable body 710 overlaps the front of the decorative symbol display device 479, which is one of the positions that the player can easily pay attention to. It is easy to recognize the moving movable body 710, and thereby it is possible to preferably recognize that the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the game balls are distributed by the stage 625, the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position (see FIG. 27), and the light emitting unit 779A of the decorative symbol display device 779 is made to emit light, thereby causing the stage. The rolling surface of 625 is illuminated. Therefore, the game ball to be sorted by the stage 625 rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the light emitting unit 779A.

Since the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 is related to the establishment of the starting conditions for the first special symbol lottery (that is, the entry of the game balls into the lower middle starting winning device 431), the player can use the lower middle starting winning device. Pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 while expecting the game balls to enter 431. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the light emitting unit 779A, the light illuminating the rolling surface causes the player to expect the game ball to enter the lower middle start winning device 431. Functions as. As a result, the player's expectation is aroused, and the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the stage 625 can be suitably improved.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the operation and effect of the decorative symbol display device 779 arranged on the movable body 710 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, the variable display and the final display (stop display showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery) of the unit game related to the second special symbol are the decorative symbol display device 779 arranged on the movable body 710. Since it is displayed by using, the variable display and the final display of the unit game related to the special symbol are more interesting to the player than the conventional typical gaming machine displayed on the screen such as the decorative symbol display device 479. Can be given.

Further, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position or the irradiation position, the player visually recognizes not the entire character 779B of "this" but a part thereof through the discharge port 627 or the entrance / exit 626. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at these positions, the player can win the character 779B formed on the surface of the central light emitting portion 779A by the original lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. It is difficult to recognize that it is the character "to" that indicates that there is.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the movable body 710 has a variation display position such as an initial position and an irradiation position (that is, a variation of the unit game related to the second special symbol using the decorative symbol display device 779). When it is placed at a position different from the position where the display and the confirmation display are performed), the character 779B which is visually recognized through the discharge port 627 or the entrance 626 is visually recognized as a content which does not indicate that it is a big hit. Even though the decorative symbol display device 779 is not in a situation of displaying the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the decorative symbol display device 779 as having obtained a big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being meaninglessly discouraged due to the misidentification of the lottery result, and thus it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game due to such misidentification.

Visualizing the character 779B as a content that does not indicate that it is a big hit is a relatively simple configuration in which the character 779B is visually recognized via the outlet 627 or the entrance 626 instead of being controlledly changed to a different character. Can be realized with. In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to visually recognize the character 779B as a content that does not indicate that it is a big hit, the front side of the game machine connected to the passage of the game ball, such as the outlet 627 and the entrance 626. Since the opening is used, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated opening (window portion), and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the entrance 626 and the discharge port 627 are the entrance and exit of the passage for discharging the game ball rolling on the stage 625 to the upstream side of the lower middle start winning device 431, the entrance 626 or the discharge port Although the character 799B visually recognized from 627 is visually recognized as a content that does not indicate that it is a big hit, a part of the character 799B is visually recognized from the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627, so that the entrance 626 or the discharge port is visible. The advantage of the game ball passing through the 627 can be noticed to the player.

In particular, when the movable body 710 is in the irradiation position, the character 779B whose part is visually recognized through the entrance 626 is visually recognized as if it is a downward arrow (that is, “↓”). , The player can associate the entrance 626 with the lower middle start winning device 431 located below the entrance 626. Therefore, the player can have a great expectation regarding the right of the first special symbol lottery for the game ball that has entered the entrance 626.

<Change in display position of decorative pattern according to the position of movable body 710>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27 again, a change in the display position of the decorative symbol according to the position of the movable body 710 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed as the decorative symbol Z. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbols (for example, numbers). The decorative symbol Z is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 by scrolling these symbols for each symbol row, for example.

The decorative symbol Z may be composed of three or more rows of symbols, and the direction in which the respective symbol rows are arranged is not limited to the left-right direction. Further, the symbols in each symbol sequence are not limited to numbers, and may be, for example, a card form on which numbers are drawn or a character. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the form in which the symbol is scrolled for each symbol row, for example, the symbol is rotated on the spot and the contents of the symbol are switched each time the front and back are switched by the rotation. There may be.

As shown in FIG. 24, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position is located below the decorative symbol display device 479 and does not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the variable display or the definite display by the decorative symbol Z is displayed in the default size (maximum size) at the default position substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the irradiation position of the movable body 710 is such that the movable body 710 arranged at the irradiation position overlaps the decorative symbol Z displayed at the default position on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the default size. It is considered to be a position that does not become. That is, even when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the variable display or the definite display by the decorative symbol Z is displayed at the default position on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the default size.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, since the movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position overlaps most of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine, the decorative symbol display device 479 is exposed to the player. The area to do is limited. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position, the pachinko machine 100 is controlled (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)) to reduce the size of the decorative symbol Z and the decorative symbol display device 479. Is displayed in the exposed area (in the example shown in FIG. 25, the upper right area). As a result, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position, it is possible to prevent the definite display of the decorative symbol Z from being hidden behind the movable body 710 and becoming invisible.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the movable body 710 is arranged at an intermediate position, the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 479 is exposed, but the movable body 710 overlaps the lower side. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position, the reduced size decorative symbol Z is displayed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)) of the decorative symbol display device 479. Display in the exposed area left on the upper side. Therefore, for example, when the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves to the intermediate position, the decorative symbol Z also moves upward with the movement.

As described above, the movable body 710 is arranged at an intermediate position when there is a possibility that the game ball can enter the upper middle start winning device 632. Therefore, the decorative symbol Z moves upward in response to the movable body 710 being arranged at the intermediate position, so that the player can pay attention to the upper middle start winning device 632 located above.

For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol Z in the unit game related to the first special symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632. Therefore, the variable display during execution is continued by the reduced size decorative symbol Z at the upper position on the decorative symbol display device 479. That is, in such a case, the variable display by the reduced size decorative symbol Z is performed at the upper position on the decorative symbol display device 479. When there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632 in a state where neither the decorative symbol display device 479 nor the variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779 is executed (so-called waiting state for customers). In addition, the reduced size decorative symbol Z may be displayed at an upper position on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, when the movable body 710 is arranged at an intermediate position, the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)) is performed on the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 479. ), Along with the decorative symbol Z, arrows 731 and 732 pointing upwards are displayed. As a result, the player's attention to the upper middle start winning device 632 can be further increased.

Further, since the arrows 731 and 732 point upward, the player can be made aware that the decorative symbol Z is moving upward. In that respect as well, the player's attention to the upper middle start winning device 632 can be further increased. In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the arrow 731 on the left side points to the upper right and the arrow 732 on the right side points to the upper left, and the degree of attention to the decorative symbol Z displayed between these arrows 731 and 732 is more preferable. It is raised to.

Next, in the pachinko machine 100, the action and effect of changing the display position of the decorative symbol according to the position of the movable body 710 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 moves upward, so that the player can use the decorative symbol Z. It is possible to recognize the occurrence of the possibility of entry from the movement of and the direction of movement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 (that is, the player satisfies the start condition for the second special symbol lottery). That is, the player can easily witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632. As a result, it is possible to preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the game ball is inserted into the upper middle start winning device 632.

Further, the upper middle start winning device 632, which is set to have a lower probability of the game ball entering than the lower middle starting winning device 431, is a place where the player can easily miss the entry of the game ball, as described above. In addition, by moving the decorative symbol Z, the player can witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 with a suitable probability. It is possible to improve the interest of the.

In particular, the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 indicates the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, and is therefore one of the places where the player is most likely to pay attention. Therefore, since the player can catch the movement of the decorative symbol Z with a high probability, it is more preferable that the movement of the decorative symbol Z causes the game ball to enter the upper middle start winning device 632. Can be recognized by the player.

Further, the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 is suggested to the player by using the decorative symbol Z indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. To give the player a sense of expectation for the entry of the game ball into the related start winning device (upper middle start winning device 632) at the same time as the expectation for the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery which is not related to the second special symbol lottery. Can be done.

Further, since the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z is the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located (that is, upward), the player's line of sight is aligned with the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z to the upper middle starting winning device 632. And can be turned to nature. As a result, the player can witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 with a suitable probability.

When the decorative symbol Z is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 due to the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632, the reduced size decorative symbol Z is displayed, so that the decorative symbol display device 479 is displayed. The lower side of the above can be largely secured as an area where the decorative symbol Z is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, not only the decorative symbol Z is moved upward, but also the movable body 710 is moved to the intermediate position as described above. Since it is moved, the player's consciousness can be directed more strongly to the upper side where the upper middle start winning device 632 is arranged. This makes it possible for the player to more preferably recognize that the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632.

<Game state transition control>
Next, an example of transition control of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery content of the special symbol and the transitional gaming state.

The game state transition control is performed by the control of the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10), and the numerical data and control programs related to the transition of each game state such as the winning probability and the distribution probability are stored in the ROM of the main control board 920. It is remembered in. The main control board 920 generates a normal gaming state, a special gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state as the gaming states of the pachinko machine 100. The transition from the normal game state to another game state is executed with the winning of the big hit lottery related to the special symbol as an opportunity, and when the big hit lottery is won in the normal game state, the time saving game is performed via the special game state. It becomes a state or returns to a normal game state.

In the pachinko machine 100, as the lottery related to the special symbol, the lottery related to the first special symbol and the lottery related to the second special symbol are executed. As shown in FIG. 28, the lottery related to the special symbol is executed according to the same winning probability (approximately 1/23) regardless of the symbol type, and the winning random number counter can take a value (for example, "0 to 0"). The winning value (for example, "0 to 2859") is set in advance for 65535 "), and the winning probability of the big hit is determined by the ratio of this range to the winning value.

When the big hit lottery related to the special symbol is won, as shown in FIG. 28, one big hit type is selected from the big hit types set to a total of 7 types of the first big hit 1 to 5 and the second big hit 1 and 2. Will be done. The jackpot type is determined for each special symbol type, and when the lottery for each special symbol is won, the jackpot type is selected according to the predetermined selection conditions, and specifically, it is acquired based on the starting prize. It is selected according to the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter.

As shown in FIG. 28, five types of jackpots 1 to 5 are set for the first jackpot. The first jackpots 1 to 5 are selected by lottery using the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter so as to follow a predetermined distribution probability. As for each distribution probability, for example, the first jackpot 1 is "18.85%", the first jackpot 2 is "4.15%", the first jackpot 3 is "0.05%", and the first jackpot 4 is. "51.30%" and the first jackpot 5 are set to "25.65%".

As the special gaming state that occurs when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, two types of special gaming states in which the average number of balls that can be acquired (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of acquired balls) are different are set. The special game state in which the number of acquired balls is small is composed of multiple (4 times) rounds. The opening (short opening) for a short time (approximately 0.05 seconds), which is almost impossible for the player to enter, is regarded as the end of one round, and the posture is changed to the entry prohibited posture, and the winning opening is closed. Therefore, even if the short opening round is repeated a plurality of times, the game ball does not enter the central prize winning device 434, and the number of balls fired in the special game state is consumed.

The special game state with a large number of acquired balls is composed of multiple (3 times) rounds, and in each round, the central prize-winning device 434 takes an approach-allowed posture for a longer time than the round in the short-open special game state. The winning opening is opened. In the long-open special game state, the winning opening of the central prize-winning device 434 is opened to start the round, and a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, for example). When 8) game balls are detected by the big winning switch 443, the game shifts to the entry prohibited posture as the end of one round, and the winning opening is closed. Therefore, when the long open round is repeated a plurality of times, the game ball enters the central prize winning device 434 in proportion to the number of rounds, and the player has a substantially constant number of balls (147) in the special game state. Acquire a game ball (pieces).

When the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, the case where the time-saving game state occurs after the special game state and the case where the time-saving game state does not occur (that is, the case where the number of time reductions is 0) are set. Has been done. In addition, whether or not the time-saving game state occurs and the number of times of time reduction correspond to the game state in which it is determined whether or not to generate the time-saving game state. The conditions are set so that the time-saving game state is more likely to occur if the player wins.

Specifically, when the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is won and the first big hits 1 and 4 are selected, the time saving number is set to "0 times" and the special game state is set. Later, the normal game state is started. If the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is won and the first big hits 2, 3 and 5 are selected, the game transitions to the time saving game state and the time saving number is 2, 5 for the first big hit. Transitions to the time-saving game state of "1 time", and in the case of the first big hit 3, "87 times". The number of time reductions is the maximum number of times that the lottery related to the special symbol is continuously executed in the time saving game state transitioned after the special gaming state, and the upper limit that the lottery related to the special symbol can be continuously non-winning. It matches the number of times. If the lottery related to the special symbol is not won in succession until the number of time reductions is reached, the time reduction game state ends and the game returns to the normal game state. The average value of the number of time reductions added when the lottery for the first special symbol in the non-time reduction state is won is the sum of the distribution probability in each first jackpot multiplied by the number of time reductions in the non-time reduction state. It can be expressed by, and it is about 0.34 times.

When the lottery related to the first special symbol in the time-saving state is won, a longer time saving number is more likely to be selected than when the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time-saving state is won, and any of the first big hits 1 to 5 is selected. Even if it is selected, the number of time reductions is set to "87 times". The average value of the number of time reductions added when the lottery for the first special symbol in the time reduction state is won is also expressed by the sum of the distribution probability in each first jackpot and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state. It can be done 87 times.

When the ratio of the jackpot type related to the first special symbol is roughly classified according to the number of time reductions, the distribution ratios of the first jackpots 1 and 4 corresponding to "0 times" are "18.85%" and "51.30%". The distribution ratio of the first jackpot 2.5 corresponding to "70.15%" and "1 time" is "29.8%" which is the addition of "4.15%" and "25.65%". The distribution ratio of the first jackpot 3 corresponding to "87 times" is "0.05%". For this reason, when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, "0 times" is selected in most cases and does not transition to the time-saving game state, accounting for about 70%, and with a lower probability of about 30%, "1 time". The time-saving gaming state of "" occurs, and "87 times" is regarded as a specially advantageous gaming state that rarely occurs.

The special gaming state that occurs when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won is set to be more advantageous to the player than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. As shown in FIG. 28, two types of jackpots related to the second special symbol are set, the second jackpots 1 and 2, and the second jackpots 1 and 2 are jackpot symbols so as to follow a predetermined distribution probability. It is selected by lottery using the value of the random number counter. As each distribution probability, the second jackpot 1 is set to "75.00%" and the second jackpot 2 is set to "25.00%".

As the special gaming state that occurs when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, two types of special gaming states in which the number of balls that can be acquired (the number of acquired balls) are different are set. Each special game state is composed of a plurality of rounds with different times, and in each round, the central prize-winning device 434 takes a long-open entry allowable posture in which a certain number of game balls can enter, and the winning opening is opened. NS. The number of long open rounds is set to 5 rounds (5R) and 3 rounds (3R), and is "245" for 5 rounds and "147" for 3 rounds. It is set to the number of acquired balls. Each round that constitutes the long-open special gaming state related to the second special symbol is set to the same opening and closing conditions as the round that constitutes the long-open special gaming state related to the first special symbol, and common control is applied. in use. Further, the special game state of the long opening related to the second special symbol is set to the same number of rounds as the special gaming state of the long opening related to the first special symbol, and the same control can be used. ..

When the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, the player is set to be more advantageous than the case where the lottery related to the first special symbol is won with respect to the condition for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state after the special gaming state. ing. Specifically, when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, it is set to transition to the time-saving game state regardless of whether it is in the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state, and the lottery related to the special symbol is set. If you win, the probability of transitioning to the time-saving game state is set to a high probability.

Regarding the number of time reductions, when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, the player is set to be more advantageous than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. Specifically, when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, the number of time reductions and the average value thereof are set to "87 times", and the number of continuations is larger than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. It is set so that the time-saving game state can be easily selected.

Next, the progress control of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the progress control of the gaming state. Here, FIG. 29 schematically shows the establishment of the main conditions in each gaming state and the control of the device executed when the conditions are satisfied, and shows the gaming methods necessary for the player in each gaming state. It is also shown.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, it is set to the normal gaming state. In the normal game state, the game is performed by the left-handed game method, and the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 related to the second special symbol to relate to the special symbol. A start-up prize will be generated and a big hit lottery will be held.

When the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431, it becomes the starting prize of the first special symbol (first starting prize), the right of the unit game is generated, and the lottery related to the first special symbol is performed. , The variable display that is confirmed and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is performed. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variation display to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 24) to obtain normal numbers. Using the symbols (1 to 9), the effect of the variation display (normal symbol variation effect) in which the combination of the three numbers of left, middle, and right is used as the stop symbol is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the first special symbol is won at approximately 1/23, and when the jackpot lottery is won, the game transitions to the special game state.

When the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol is won, one of two types of special gaming states, short opening and long opening, occurs. The main control board 920 controls the lower center grand prize device 434 (see FIG. 7) to change its posture under conditions corresponding to each type of special gaming state. Due to the control of the main control board 920, the player can hardly acquire the game ball in the short-open special game state, and the game ball is hardly paid out from the pachinko machine 100, while the long-open special game state. Then, the player can win a certain number or more of prize balls by playing the game by the right-handed gaming method.

Here, from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940, at least one of the timing of executing the variation display before each special game state occurs and the timing of starting the special game state, the jackpot type is selected. The corresponding control command is transmitted, and the sub-control board 940 recognizes the jackpot type based on the control command, and performs operation notification control that outputs information on the operation required for the player. The details of this operation notification control will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

After the special game state, the transition game state differs depending on the jackpot type selected when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, and if the first jackpot is 1 or 4, the game state returns to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the first big hit is 2 or 5, the time saving state will continue until the timing of the start of one fluctuation, and if the first big hit is 3, "87 times" will be the upper limit of the number of games and the time will be shortened. It transitions to a long-term short-time game state in which the state continues.

The short-term time-saving game state is composed of a combination of a time-saving state and a non-time-saving state. In the short-time working hours game state, the working hours state is reached until the first fluctuation is started, and when the first fluctuation is started, the working hours state is changed to the non-short working hours state.

When the game transitions to the short-term short-time game state, the game method differs depending on whether or not the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is reserved at the start timing of the short-term short-time game state. If the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is reserved even once, the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol is executed for the right of the unit game first reserved immediately after the start of the short-term short-time game state, and the jackpot is won. If so, the jackpot type selection will also be performed. In addition, the content of the variation display (variation time and stop symbol) for the reserved unit game is also selected. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variation display started during the short-time short game state to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. , A plurality of light emitting units 779A emit light in order, and finally the central light emitting unit 779A emits light to indicate the winning of the lottery related to the special symbol, and finally one of the light emitting units 779A deviated from the center emits light. By doing so, an effect indicating non-winning (hereinafter, also referred to as a whale roulette variable effect) is executed.

The whale roulette variation effect is executed only once, which corresponds to the number of variation displays started during the short-term short-time game state. If you win the whale roulette fluctuation production, it will be a big hit, and it will shift to the special game state, and if it is not won (missing), you will play a game by the left-handed game method (hereinafter also referred to as left-handed game). Return to the normal game state. Since the big hit lottery related to the special symbol is won at about 1/23, when the whale roulette fluctuation effect occurs, the game transitions to the special gaming state at about 1/23. Since the selection of the jackpot type in the short-term time-saving game state is executed during the time-saving state, the long-term time-saving game state after the special game state regardless of which jackpot type related to the first special symbol is selected. Move to.

In the case of transition to the short-term short-time game state, if the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is not reserved even once, the right of one unit game related to the special symbol is established after the short-term short-time game state is started. There is a need. In this one unit game, the probability of transitioning to the long-term short-time game state is approximately 1/23, and the long-time short-time game state is entered by the jackpot lottery related to the first special symbol in which the start prize is mainly generated in the normal game state. It is significantly higher than the probability of transition. Therefore, the player plays the game in the hope of acquiring the right of the unit game as soon as possible. In this case, the right-starting winning device 432 continues to be in a time-saving state in which it is easy to take an approach-allowed posture until the execution of one variation display is started. Therefore, the player has a game area (a region in which the game ball flows down and flows down) on the right side of the central structure 420 in which the right start winning device 432 and the starting device 436 for operating the right start winning device 432 are arranged. By the right-handed game method in which the game ball is made to flow down into the area (see FIG. 7), it is possible to easily generate a start prize for the execution of one variable display and establish the right of the unit game.

When the game ball enters the right-starting winning device 432 after transitioning to the short-term short-time gaming state, the starting winning prize of the second special symbol (second starting winning prize) is executed, the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is executed, and the jackpot is won. If so, the jackpot type selection is also performed, and the content of the fluctuation display (variation time and stop symbol) is also selected. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variation display started during the short-time short game state to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. Then, the whale roulette fluctuation effect is executed. In this case, the winning probability of the lottery related to the first special symbol and the winning probability of the lottery related to the second special symbol started in the short-term short-time game state are set to the same probability (approximately 1/23). , The probability of transitioning to the long-term short-time game state after winning is also set to be the same. Therefore, when the whale roulette variation effect is executed, a long-term time-saving game with the same expectation regardless of whether it is a unit game related to the first special symbol or a unit game related to the second special symbol. It is possible to expect a transition to a state, and even if the type of special symbol is different, the progress of the game can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the lottery result by the common whale roulette fluctuation effect.

During the whale roulette fluctuation effect, the whale roulette is not in the time-saving state but in the non-time-saving state, and the right-starting winning device 432 is in a gaming state in which it is difficult to take an approach-allowed posture as compared with the time-saving state. When even one ball wins the right start winning device 432 and the second start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) detects the winning of the game ball after the short-term time-saving game state occurs, the main control board 920 shortens the time. The control is switched from the state to the control of the right start winning device 432 corresponding to the non-time saving state. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously fired by the game by the right-handed game method (hereinafter, also referred to as the right-handed game), the game ball is likely to be consumed, and the player does not need to perform the firing operation.

When the result indicating the winning of the lottery related to the special symbol is displayed in the whale roulette fluctuation effect, a special game state occurs. This special gaming state corresponds to any of a total of seven types of first jackpots 1 to 5 and second jackpots 1 and 2, and in a short-open special gaming state in which the number of acquired balls is "0", it depends on the player. It is not necessary to launch a game ball, and in a long-open special game state in which the number of acquired balls is a certain number or more, a prize ball can be acquired by a right-handed game.

After the special gaming state generated by winning the lottery related to the special symbol in the whale roulette fluctuation production, it becomes a long-term short-time gaming state. The long-term time-saving game state is a time-saving state in which the right-starting winning device 432 can easily take an entry-allowed posture until the execution of the 87th variation display is started or the lottery related to the special symbol is won and the game transitions to the special game state. Continues. The player can easily enter the game ball into the right start winning device 432 by the right-handed game.

When the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the long-term short-time game state, the start prize of the second special symbol (second start prize) is generated, the right of the unit game is generated, and the lottery related to the second special symbol is performed. However, a variable display is performed in which the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed and displayed. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variation display to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 24), and the normal gaming state is set. Using different number symbols (for example, symbols that are normally displayed in red and displayed in yellow), a variable display effect that uses the combination of the three numbers left, middle, and right as the stop symbol (time saving and medium symbol variation effect) ) Is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the second special symbol is won at approximately 1/23, and when the jackpot lottery is won, the game transitions to the special game state, and then the long-term time-saving game state is started again.

In the long-term short-time game state, the start prize of the second special symbol mainly occurs. Therefore, if the big hit lottery is won, it is easy to shift to the special game state of long opening by the second big hits 1 and 2, and the prize ball can be won by continuing the right-handed game.

When the stop symbol corresponding to the result of non-winning is confirmed and displayed in the variation display related to the special symbol 86 times from the start of the long-term time-saving game state, and then the 87th variation display is started, the main control board 920 The control of the right start winning device 432 is switched from the time-saving gaming state to the control corresponding to the normal gaming state. Therefore, after the 87th variation display is started, the game ball is likely to be consumed even if the game ball is continuously fired by the right-handed game, and the player does not need to perform the firing operation. Then, when the stop symbol corresponding to the result of non-winning is confirmed and displayed on the 87th variation display, the long-term short-time gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is restored.

As described above, as the transition pattern to the long-term time-saving gaming state, the normal transition pattern generated when the start prize of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state by the left-handed game is triggered has been described. The transition pattern also causes a transition from the normal gaming state to the long-term short-time gaming state.

As another transition pattern, first, a transition pattern is set triggered by the case where the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 during the normal game state by the left-handed game. In this transition pattern, the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 during the normal gaming state, and becomes the starting winning of the second special symbol (second starting winning). In the unit game related to the second start winning, the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is executed, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is also selected, and the contents of the variable display (variable time and stop symbol) are displayed. Selection is also done. The main control board 920 transmits a control command to the sub control board 940 corresponding to the content of the variation display in the normal gaming state related to the second special symbol, and the sub control board 940 transmits the decorative symbol display device 779. Control and execute the whale roulette fluctuation effect. In this way, the whale roulette variation effect is when the start prize of the second special symbol occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the right start prize device 432 in the short-time short game state, and the upper middle start prize device in the normal game state. It is set that the same effect is executed when the start prize of the second special symbol is generated by the entry of the game ball into the 632.

Here, in the lottery relating to the second special symbol, the probability of transitioning to the long-term time-saving game state after the winning is set to be the same in both the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when the whale roulette variation effect is executed, which of the two starting winning devices 432 and 632 related to the second special symbol is entered as the unit game related to the second special symbol is entered. Regardless, it is possible to expect a transition to a long-term short-time gaming state with the same expectation. Therefore, even if the game state in which the change display of the second special symbol is executed is different, the player can see that the transition probability to the long-term time-saving game state is the same by displaying the lottery result by the common whale roulette change effect. Can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, as another transition pattern to the long-term time-saving game state, the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431 during the normal game state by the left-handed game and wins the lottery related to the first special symbol, and the winning is won. The case where the first jackpot 3 is selected as the jackpot type selected in is set. In the case of this transition pattern, unlike other transition patterns, the transition to the long-term time-saving gaming state is performed without going through the whale roulette fluctuation effect. For this reason, the player can not only visually recognize the winning by the whale roulette variation effect for the long-term short-time gaming state, but also can provide the playability to expect an unexpected transition pattern.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, as the jackpot type related to the first special symbol, the first jackpots 2 and 5 that transition to the short-term time-saving gaming state according to the selection conditions in the non-time-saving state corresponding to the normal gaming state are short-term. The first jackpots 1 to 5 that transition to the long-term time-saving gaming state are provided depending on the selection conditions in the time-saving gaming state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. Also in the above, big hits (second big hits 1 and 2) that transition to a long-term time-saving gaming state are provided. Therefore, as the starting prize of the first special symbol, the game has a game property of gradually transitioning to the long-term short-time gaming state via the short-term short-time gaming state by the entry of the game ball into the lower middle start winning device 431 a plurality of times. On the other hand, it is possible to add the game property of transitioning to the long-term time-saving game state by the result of one lottery by the entry of the game ball into the right-start winning device 432.

Next, the control of the main control board 920 at the start of the short-term short-time gaming state will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing the control of the main control board 920 at the start of the short-term short game state. The control at the start of the short-time short game state is executed as a part of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) executed by the main control board 920. The control of the short-term short-time game state differs depending on whether or not the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is reserved, and the case where the right of the unit game is reserved at the start of the short-term short-time game state is shown in FIG. 30 (A). ) Will be mainly referred to, and then the case where the right of the unit game is not held will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 30 (B).

The main control board 920 is provided with a flag (a part of the RAM of the main control board 920) as a plurality of storage means for storing the ongoing game state, and as a part of the flag, the special game state is being executed. A special game state flag that is turned on and a time saving state flag that is turned on during the time saving state are provided. The short-term short-time game state is a game state in which a part of the game is changed when a big hit is won based on the start prize of the first special symbol.

When all the rounds that make up the special game state corresponding to the jackpot winning are completed and the ending period after that is completed, it is time to end the special game state. As shown in FIG. 30A, the main control board 920 turns off the special game state flag and turns on the time saving state flag in order to start the short-term time saving game state.

If the right of the unit game is reserved at the start of the short-term short-time game state, the variable display related to the special symbol can be started by the end of the special game state. The main control board 920 executes the jackpot determination / type selection and the content setting of the variation display corresponding to the reserved unit game right during the time saving state, and the special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 (see FIG. 7). The variable state of is switched from stopped to fluctuating (see FIG. 30 (A)). At the timing of switching the variable state, the main control board 920 transmits a control command to the sub control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and the decorative symbol display device 779 also switches the variable state from stopped to changed.

When the first variation display in the short-term time-saving game state is started, the main control board 920 turns off the time-saving state flag (see FIG. 30 (A)), and the game ball can easily enter the right start winning device 432. Starts control corresponding to the non-time saving state, which is more difficult than the time saving state. In the process of setting to start the first variation display and the process of setting from turning on the time saving state flag to turning off, the right start winning device 432 takes an entry allowable posture and the game ball starts right. It is preferably executed in a short time so as not to enter the winning device 432, and is preferably executed in one timer interrupt process of the main control board 920.

When the game ball enters the starting device 436 (see FIG. 7) related to the normal symbol while the time saving state flag is off, the starting switch 446 (see FIG. 10) is temporarily turned on as shown in FIG. 30 (A). When turned on, the entry of the game ball into the starting device 436 is detected on the main control board 920. When the start switch 446 is turned on, the fluctuation display related to the normal symbol is executed, and if the lottery related to the normal symbol is won, the right entry regulation solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) is turned on and the right start winning device 432 (FIG. 10). 7) takes an approach-allowed posture corresponding to the non-time saving state.

Here, it is preferable to set the time (variation time) of one fluctuation display related to the normal symbol in the non-time saving state to the same selection condition as the fluctuation time in the time saving state to simplify the control related to the normal symbol. .. Further, the fluctuation time in the time-saving state as the fluctuation time related to the normal symbol is set to less than about 1.0 second, preferably less than 0.1 second, in the game related to the first special symbol in the short-term time-saving game state. It is preferable to start the game earlier, and this makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling depressed due to the smooth progress of the game and spending a lot of time until the start winning is generated.

Next, a case where the right of the unit game is not reserved at the start of the short-term short-time game state will be described. When the ending period of the special game state ends, the main control board 920 turns off the special game state flag and turns on the time reduction state flag in order to start the short time time reduction game state, as shown in FIG. 30 (B). When the short-term short-time game state is started, the variable display related to the special symbol can be started, but since the main control board 920 does not have the right to the reserved unit game, it waits for the start winning.

When the player plays a right-handed game in a situation where the time saving state flag is turned on and the time saving state continues, the flow area (see FIG. 7) in which the starting device 436 and the right starting winning device 432 are arranged is displayed. The game ball flows down. When the game ball enters the starting device 436 during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the starting switch 446 is temporarily turned on and the game ball enters the starting device 436 to enter the main control board 920. Detected. When the start switch 446 is turned on, the fluctuation display related to the normal symbol is executed, and if the lottery related to the normal symbol is won, the right entry regulation solenoid 463 is turned on and the right start winning device 432 is entered corresponding to the time saving state. Take an acceptable posture.

The permissible approach posture for one winning in the time-saving state is set to a time (approximately 2.4 seconds) sufficiently longer than the firing time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the right start winning device 432, and the entry of the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 442. When the winning of the game ball is detected in the second starting winning switch 442, the starting winning of the second special symbol is made, and the main control board 920 responds to the unit game right generated by the starting winning during the time saving state. The jackpot determination / type selection and the content setting of the variation display are executed, and the variation state of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 472 (see FIG. 10) is switched from stopped to changing (see FIG. 30 (B)).

Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the second start winning switch 442, the main control board 920 turns off the time saving state flag and switches from the time saving state to the control of the right starting winning device 432 corresponding to the non-time saving state. .. As a result, even if the lottery related to the normal symbol is won after that, the right start winning device 432 takes an approach allowable posture corresponding to the non-time saving state, and the starting winning of the second special symbol in the short time saving game state is once. It is easy to limit by the time the variable display is executed.

Further, when the right of the unit game is not reserved at the start of the short-term short-time game state, the start prize of the second special symbol is likely to be limited to only once. Specifically, as the control of the right approach regulation solenoid 463 by the main control board 920, the entry of one game ball into the right start winning device 432 is the second start in the situation where the entry allowable posture is taken during the time saving state. When detected by the winning switch 442, the main control board 920 turns off the right entry restricting solenoid 463 so as to shift the approach allowed posture to the approach prohibited posture even before the maximum approach allowed time has elapsed. That is, the maximum permissible number of entering the right-starting winning device 432 in the time-saving state is set to the number (1) required for the number of executions of the variation display of the short-term time-saving gaming state, and the right-starting winning device is larger than the required number. The configuration is such that it is easy to prevent the game ball from entering the 432.

In this way, when a short-term time-saving game state occurs, if one variable display that reaches the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (upper limit number of games) is suspended at the start, immediately after the start of the short-term time-saving game state. The variable display is started, the time saving state flag is turned off at the timing when the execution of the variable display is started, and the control of the right start winning device 432 corresponds to the non-time saving state from the control corresponding to the time saving state (easy entry control). It is changed to control (entry normal control). Further, even when the variable display is started during the short-term time-saving game state, the time-saving state flag is turned off, and the control of the right-start winning device 432 is changed from the easy approach control to the normal approach control. For this reason, when the first variation display that reaches the upper limit of the number of time reductions (upper limit number of games) is executed during the short-term time reduction game state, the right start winning device 432 game ball is easily entered by the approach normal control. Even if the player executes a right-handed game, the game ball hardly enters the right-start winning device 432. Therefore, in the short-term short-time game state, the player can concentrate his / her consciousness on the variable display during execution and the display of the result information without the operation of entering the game ball into the game area. Therefore, the display corresponding to the winning is made as the result information of the fluctuation display, and it is possible to easily raise the expectation of the transition to the long-term time-saving gaming state.

The timing of turning off the time-saving state flag corresponding to the maximum number of games in the short-term time-saving game state and the control of changing the control of the start winning device 432 from the easy approach control to the normal approach control are the long-term time-saving game states. The control is the same as the 87th process corresponding to the number of up and down games in the above, and the same effect is obtained, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Notification control of operation instruction information>
Next, the operation notification control by the sub-control board 940 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an operation notification control process by the sub-control board 940.

Similar to the main control board 920, the control process on the sub control board 940 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and a command that is executed when a command from the main control board 920 is received. It is composed of an interrupt process and a timer interrupt process that is executed by interrupting the main process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 10 ms (milliseconds)). The operation notification control process is configured as a part of the timer interrupt process, and controls the control commands corresponding to each game state being executed from the main control board 920 and the contents of the variation display transmitted regarding the execution of the unit game. Executed based on the command.

The operation notification control process is a process provided for the player to easily acquire the game value that can be acquired regardless of the amount of experience and to suppress the consumption of the extra game ball. In this operation notification control process, the player is notified of the necessity of the firing operation and the situation in which the left-handed game or the right-handed game is required.

First, the types of operation notifications by the operation notification control of the sub-control board 940 will be described. Three types of operation notifications are set: left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and launch-free information output.

The left-handed information output is executed by the output of information instructing the player to play the left-handed game. Specifically, a display of characters instructing a left-handed game, such as "Please return to left-handed", is exemplified on a part of the screen (for example, the left end) of the decorative symbol display device 479. Further, a passage through which the game ball flows down is formed by a left-handed game including a top plate decoration 611, an upper left front decoration 612, and an upper right front decoration 613 (see FIG. 13) provided on the upper part of the central structure 420 (see FIG. 7). The light emitting body provided on the member may be lit to indicate the flow area of the game ball. Further, the game ball is caused to flow down with the light emitters provided in the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, and the right large winning device 433 arranged in the flow area of the game ball by the right-handed game dimmed or turned off. The area may be indicated.

Further, the output of the left-handed information may be executed by the output of voice by the sound device 281,282 (see FIG. 10). Specifically, when the left-handed game is advantageous to the player and the right-handed game is detected by the sub-control board 940 through the main control board 920 (for example, the game ball enters the starting device 436). (If you do), repeat the audio output such as "Please return to left-handed" or "Aim at the left side and shoot" a certain number of times (for example, twice) or until the execution of the left-handed game is detected. , The player may be instructed to execute the left-handed game.

Similar to the left-handed information output, the right-handed information output is also executed by the output of the information instructing the right-handed game. For example, it is arranged in the flow area of a game ball by a right-handed game in which characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on a part (for example, the right end) of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). The light emitters provided in the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, and the right large winning device 433 (see FIG. 7) emit light from the state of left-handed information output and overlap with the flow area of the game ball by the left-handed game. The light emitting body provided is dimmed or turned off, or the sound device 281,282 (see FIG. 10) outputs the sound of the right-handed information output.

The output of the firing unnecessary information is executed by generating a state suggesting to the player that the firing is unnecessary. For example, in the flow area of both the left-handed game and the right-handed game in which characters such as "no firing required" are displayed on a part of the screen (for example, the left and right edges) of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). It is executed by at least one of information output, such as all the light emitting bodies provided overlapping are dimmed or turned off, or the sound of "no need to fire" is output by the sound device 281,282 (see FIG. 10).

In the operation notification control process, as shown in FIG. 31, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the special gaming state or the time saving state (S2001), and if it is not in the special gaming state or the time saving state (S2001: N), the whale It is determined whether or not the roulette variation is being produced (abbreviated as roulette variation is being produced in FIG. 31) (S2002).

If the whale roulette fluctuation effect is being produced in the processing of S2002 (S2002: Y), the process shifts to the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003. In the firing unnecessary notification process S2003, the firing unnecessary information output corresponding to the firing unnecessary state is executed. During the whale roulette fluctuation production, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning device 432 even if the right-handed game is performed because it is in a non-time saving game state, the starting condition is almost not satisfied, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. be. Moreover, since it is possible to make a big hit with a probability of about 1/23 and transition to a long-term short-time game state via a special game state, the player can stop the firing operation and whale until the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to provide a playability that can raise the sense of expectation in the process of drawing attention to the roulette fluctuation effect and displaying the result.

In the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the whale roulette variation effect is not in progress (S2002: N), it is determined whether or not the player is in the long-term short-time game state and is in the 87th variation corresponding to the final round. Then (S2004), if the 87th inning is in progress (S2004: Y), the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. In addition, during the execution of the final variation display during the long-term time-saving game state, the game ball is in the non-time-saving state, and even if the right-handed game is performed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right-starting winning device 432, and the starting conditions are almost satisfied. However, it is also difficult to win a prize ball. In addition, since the jackpot type is selected according to the conditions related to the second special symbol in the final round of the long-term short-time game state, it is more advantageous for the player than after the player is not elected in the variable display and transitions to the normal game state. It is easy to shift to the long-term short-time game state. For this reason, it is necessary to provide the player with a playability that can raise the sense of expectation in the process of stopping the firing operation and paying attention to the time-saving and medium-sized symbol variation effect until the lottery result is displayed. Can be done.

In addition, during the whale roulette fluctuation production and during the final round of fluctuation display during the long-term time-saving game state, if the left-handed information output is executed even if the non-time-saving state is reached, the final round of fluctuation display is not displayed. It may give a bad impression to the player by giving the player an impression that the result of the winning is suggested before the result is displayed. Moreover, if the last round of variable display is won, the right-handed game must be played again, so when the left-handed information output is executed, the operation of switching between the left and right game methods becomes frequent, and in this respect. However, it may give a bad impression to the player because it promotes unnecessary operation. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 in a part of the non-time saving state.

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the long-term time-saving game state is not being changed for the 87th time (S2004: N), it is necessary to execute the left-handed game in the normal game state. In this case, it is determined whether or not the right-handed game has been executed (S2005), and if the right-handed game has been executed (S2005: Y), the left-handed instruction voice output process is performed as the left-handed instruction voice output. Execute (S2006) and shift the process to S2007. As a result, it is possible to clearly show that the game is not properly performed to the player who is interested in other than the game such as touching the mobile phone without paying attention to the game area. On the other hand, in the process of S2005, if the right-handed game is not executed (S2005N), the left-handed notification process S2007 is executed, and then the operation notification control process is terminated.

In the left-handed notification process S2007, the player visually recognizes the notification as the left-handed information output. Therefore, although the left-handed information output cannot be recognized unless the game board 400 (see FIG. 7) is visually recognized as compared with the instruction by the voice output, it is suggested that the player needs the left-handed game. can do.

In the process of S2001, if it is determined that the player is in the special gaming state or the time saving state (S2001: Y), it is determined whether the player is in the short time shortening game state (S2011), and if it is in the short time saving game state (S2011). S2011: Y), right-handed instruction voice output process S2012 is executed as a part of right-handed information output, and then right-handed notification process S2013 is executed as right-handed information output, which is visually recognizable by the player. After that, the operation notification control process is terminated. As a result, during the short-term short-time game state, the execution of the right-handed game is instructed by the voice output and the information output by the display.

In the process of S2011, if it is determined that the player is not in the short-term short game state (S2011: N), it is determined whether or not the player is in the special game state (S2021), and if it is in the special game state (S2021: Y). ), It is determined whether or not the ending period of the first jackpot is 2,5 (S2022), and if it is not during the ending period of the first jackpot 2,5 (S2022: N), the special gaming state is the first jackpot. It is determined whether it is due to 1 to 3 (S2023).

When it is determined in the processing of S2023 that the special game state is not obtained by the first big hits 1 to 3 (S2023: N), the player is at Chuo University by the right-handed game while the long-open special game states 4 and 5 are being executed. It is a situation in which a game ball can be acquired by entering the game ball into the winning device 434. In this case, it is determined whether the left-handed game is being executed (S2024), and if the execution of the left-handed game is detected (S2024: Y), the right-handed instruction voice output process S2012 and the right-handed notification process are performed. Execution of S2013 and the execution of the right-handed game are instructed. If the execution of the left-handed game is not detected in the process of S2024 (S2024: N), the right-handed instruction voice output process S2012 is skipped and the right-handed notification process S2013 is executed.

Here, in the left-handed instruction voice output processing S2006, the execution of the left-handed game is performed by the general winning device 639 in which the game ball can be detected by the execution of the left-handed game, the contact sensor 665 of the left warp passage 628, or the like. This is a process in which the audio output for a certain period of time is set when the passage is detected, and once the audio output is set, the audio output for a certain period of time is output by another control process in the timer interrupt process. Will be executed. The same applies to the right-handed instruction voice output process S2012.

In the process of S2023, when it is determined that the first big hits 1 to 3 are in the special gaming state (S2023: Y), the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. Since the number of acquired balls is 0 in the special game state of the first big hits 1 to 3, the player refrains from launching the game balls based on the information output of the launch unnecessary notification process S2003, and the extra game. The consumption of spheres can be suppressed.

In the process of S2021, when it is determined that the game is not in the special game state (S2021: N), it is determined whether or not the number of times (the number of times of hold) to suspend the execution of the unit game related to the special symbol is equal to or greater than the number of remaining time reductions. (S2025).

Here, the sub-control board 940 lights and displays the decorative symbol display device 479 and the lighting portions corresponding to the upper limit number of holdings for each type of special symbol on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 479. In the control of the lighting display of the hold count, the sub control board 940 recognizes the hold count based on the control command that can identify the hold count and the symbol type transmitted from the main control board 920, and corresponds to the hold count. The number of lighting displays is updated and controlled. A control command that can identify the number of holds and the symbol type is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 at the timing when the number of holds increases based on the start winning of the special symbol and the timing when the variable display is started. ..

Further, the remaining time reduction number is the remaining number of times that the variable display can be executed in the time reduction game state. When the short-term short-time game state and the long-term short-time game state are started, the start of the short-time game state and the remaining number of times that the variable display can be executed in the short-time game state are identified from the main control board 920 at the start timing. A possible control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 can recognize the start of the time-saving game state and whether the time-saving game state is the short-time time-saving game state or the long-time time-saving game state. ing. After the time saving game state is started, at the timing when the variation display is started, the main control board 920 transmits a control command capable of identifying the remaining time reduction number of times subtracted once by executing the variation display, and sub-controls. The board 940 is capable of recognizing the number of remaining time reductions after updating by executing the variation display.

In the process of S2025, when it is determined that the number of hold times is less than the number of remaining time reductions (S2025: N), the process proceeds to the process of S2024, and the right-handed game is instructed by the processes of S2024, S2012, and S2013. When the number of holdings is less than the number of remaining time reductions, it is necessary to allow the game ball to enter the right start winning device 432 in order to execute the variation display in the time reduction game state, and the game ball is entered into the right start winning device 432 during the time reduction state. Because of the situation where it is easy to enter, the prompt execution of the right-handed game is encouraged.

On the other hand, in the process of S2025, when it is determined that the number of hold times is equal to or greater than the number of remaining time reductions (S2025: Y), the process proceeds to the process of S2003, and the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. If the number of holds is equal to or greater than the number of remaining time reductions, it means that a start prize that needs to be executed has already occurred in the time reduction game state. Refrain from launching game balls. As a result, it is possible to easily end the time-saving game state at a number of times close to the number of times that the time-saving game state can be executed preset. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the variable display as the time-saving game state is executed extra, and the player is encouraged to play right-handed games only during the period required for the time-saving game state. For the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to easily operate the pachinko machine 100 in a form close to the winning probability in the set time-saving game state.

In the processing of S2022, even when it is determined that the ending period of the first jackpot is 2,5 (S2022: Y), it is determined by the processing of S2025 whether or not the number of hold times is equal to or greater than the number of remaining time reductions (S2025). If the number of hold times is equal to or greater than the number of remaining hours (S2025: Y), the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. Since the first jackpots 2 and 5 transition to the short-time short-time game state after the special game state, if the number of holds is updated to 1 or more corresponding to the remaining time-shortening number executed in the short-time short-time game state, the right. Since it is not necessary to continue the hitting game and consume the game ball during the ending period, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the game ball by outputting information that does not require firing. In addition, when the ending period of the first big hit 4 is in progress, the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 may be executed regardless of whether or not the number of hold times is equal to or greater than the remaining time reduction number, whereby the special gaming state may be executed. Even in the situation where the game transitions to the normal game state after the above, the consumption of the game ball can be suppressed.

In the processing of S2022, when it is determined that the ending period of the first jackpot is 2,5 (S2022: Y), and when it is determined by the processing of S2025 that the number of hold times is less than the number of remaining time reductions (S2022: Y). S2025: N), the process proceeds to S2024, and the right-handed game is instructed by the processes of S2024, S2012 and S2013. As a result, it is possible to easily generate a start prize of a special symbol necessary for executing the short-term short-time game state immediately after the start of the short-time short-time game state.

Here, if the period from the occurrence of the first big hit via the normal symbol variation effect to the execution of the second variation display by the whale roulette variation effect becomes long, the variation display is stopped for a long time. Even if the expectation for the transition to the long-term short-time gaming state due to the occurrence of the second jackpot increases due to the first jackpot, the expectation may decrease. On the other hand, by processing S2022 and S2025, it is determined that the right-handed game is continued from the ending period before the start of the short-term short-time game state, so that the start prize of the special symbol necessary for executing the short-time short-time game state is won. Can be easily generated at an early stage, and the expectation in the second variation display can be easily maintained.

As described above, the sub-control board 940 performs a left-handed notification process as an operation notification control process, which provides a visually recognizable notification by the player as an output of left-handed information corresponding to the execution of the left-handed game in the normal game state. S2007, right-handed notification process S2013 that provides visually recognizable notification by the player as right-handed information corresponding to the execution of the right-handed game in the special game state and the time-saving game state, and the first jackpot 2, 5 Before the end of the special gaming state corresponding to the ending of, or before the end of the long-term short-time gaming state, the upper limit of the number of time reductions (upper limit number of games) is reached in the short-term short-time gaming state or long-term short-time gaming state that transitions thereafter. When the execution of the variation display for the remaining number of times or more required by is suspended (S2025: Y), the determination process (S2025) for generating the period for executing the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 without outputting the right-handed information. It has.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) In the above embodiment, the flow control unit 623 is configured to receive the game balls distributed by the roof 611B and the distribution device 622, but the flow control unit 623 does not necessarily have the roof 611B and the distribution device 622. It does not have to be configured to receive the game balls sorted by. For example, it may be configured to directly receive the game ball flowing down the upper game area.

(2) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to the left side or the right side by the roof 611B are all discharged to the left game area via the flow control unit 623, but the game balls distributed to the right side. It is not always necessary to pass the flow control unit 623. For example, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100.

In recent years, due to the increase in size of the central structure and the like, the size and arrangement of the area where the game ball flows down in the game area tends to be limited, but the roof 611B like the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment. Since the gaming balls distributed to either the left or right are guided to the common gaming area (that is, the left gaming area), the limited gaming area can be effectively utilized.

(3) In the above embodiment, the game balls are distributed to each of the roof 611B (first distribution unit) and the distribution device 622 (second distribution unit), but both of these distribution units are not necessarily distributed. There is no need to provide it. For example, the distribution portion may be only the roof 611B. In such a case, the starting prize of the second special symbol may be established based on the entry of the game ball into the passage port 621.

(4) In the above embodiment, the roof 611B having an upwardly convex curved shape is adopted as the first distribution portion for distributing the game balls flowing down the upper game region, but the shape of the first distribution portion. Is not necessarily limited to an upwardly convex curved shape. For example, it may be a stage or a crune that distributes the first distribution unit to either the left side, the right side, or the passage port. Alternatively, a movable object that moves in a predetermined direction may be used, and the game ball may be distributed to either the left side, the right side, or the passage port according to the movement of the movable object.

(5) In the above embodiment, the game ball distributed to either the left or right side by the roof 611B is also configured to be guided to the left game area by the flow control unit 623, but the destination guided by the flow control unit 623 is not necessarily the destination. It is not necessary to limit the game area to the side close to the entrance of the game area (that is, the exit of the launch passage 401B), that is, the left game area which is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420.

For example, when the entrance of the game area is provided on the right side, that is, when the game ball is launched from the right side, the flow control unit 623 distributes the game ball distributed by the roof 611B to the central structure 420. It may be configured to guide to the game area from the right side (hereinafter, also referred to as “right side game area”). Also in such a modified example, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment, the game ball distributed to the side far from the entrance of the game area (that is, the left side) is placed in the right game area which is the game area near the entrance. Can be entered into.

(6) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to either the left or right side by the roof 611B are guided to the left side game area by the common flow control unit 623, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game ball may be configured to fall on different flow control portions depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611 or to the right side.

In this modified example, even if the inclination surface of the flow control portion on which the game ball distributed on the left side falls and the flow regulation unit on which the game ball distributed on the right side falls have the same inclination angle, It may have different tilt angles. By setting the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the flow control section to a different angle, it is possible to make the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the outlet of each flow control section different.

Further, the flow control section where the game balls distributed on the left side fall and the flow control section where the game balls distributed on the right side fall are arranged in a substantially C shape in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. good. In such a case, it will be discharged to the left game area or the right game area depending on the distribution direction.

(7) In the above embodiment, the flow control unit 623 is configured such that its inclined surface is inclined downward from right to left, but if the game ball has a shape that can move on the flow control unit 623 to the left by its own weight. , It is not always necessary to limit the downward slope from right to left. For example, the slope of the flow control section 623 may have a curved or wavy shape so that the game ball can move on the flow control section 623 to the left by its own weight. Further, the game ball may be carried to the left game area by moving the movable body.

(8) In the above embodiment, the upper middle start winning device 632 is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction, but it is not always necessary to configure the upper middle starting winning device 632 to be movable. For example, the upper middle start winning device 632 may be fixedly provided (that is, does not move) at a predetermined position.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 632 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper middle start winning device 632 may be penetrated in the direction facing from the entrance, and the game ball that has entered the upper middle starting winning device 632 may fall onto the flow control unit 623. According to such a modification, it is possible not only to enter the upper middle start winning device 632 but also to enter the lower middle starting winning device 431 in the left game area.

(10) In the above embodiment, the upper middle start winning device 632 is configured as the starting winning device according to the second special symbol, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper middle starting winning device 632 is simply awarded. It may be configured as a general prize device for giving a ball.

(11) In the above embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of each of the left and right flow passages 652 and 653, but the number of installations is not necessarily the same. There is no need to limit. For example, one protrusion 612D and 613D may be provided in each of the flow passages 652 and 653. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the number of protrusions 612D and 613D provided in each of the flow passages 652 and 653 is set to 5, but the number is not limited as long as at least one is provided.

(12) In the above embodiment, protrusions 612D and 613D are erected on the back sides of the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A, and the portion corresponding to the bottom surface of the protrusions 612D and 613D is visually recognized as a dark portion to serve as a passage display portion. Although it is configured to function, the function as a passage display unit is not necessarily limited to being visually recognized as a dark part. For example, a streak extending in the continuous direction of the flow passages 652 and 653 may be drawn on the back side of each of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A with a coloring agent having low light transmission. Alternatively, the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A may be made to emit light so as to be distinguishable from the light for decoration so that the player can visually recognize the lines extending in the continuous direction of the flow passages 652 and 653.

(13) In the above embodiment, the continuously extending (that is, a series of) streaks caused by the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D are configured to be visually recognized by the player as a passage display portion, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no need. For example, the passage display unit may be configured so that the player can visually recognize the streaks extending intermittently (that is, in a dotted line) in the continuous direction of the flow passage passages 652 and 653 as the passage display unit.

(14) In the above embodiment, the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided on the inside of the central structure 420, more specifically, on the left and right flow passages 652 and 653 provided on the back side of the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613. Although the used passage display is configured, the passage for which the passage display unit displays the passage is not necessarily limited to the passage provided inside the central structure 420. For example, the passage passing through the back side of the structure other than the central structure 420 may be configured to display the passage by a passage display portion such as a protrusion.

(15) In the above embodiment, the flow passages 652 and 653 extending in the vertical direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100 are configured to display the passages using the protrusions 612D and 613D. Does not necessarily have to be limited to a passage extending in the vertical direction. For example, a passage having a shape that allows the game ball to reach the exit by its own weight, such as a passage extending from the upper left to the lower right, may be configured to display the passage by a passage display portion such as a protrusion.

(16) In the above embodiment, the surfaces of the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surfaces of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A may be smooth surfaces without undulations.

(17) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 responds to the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the second special symbol. It is configured to display the decorative design, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display device 479 shall display the decorative symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the second special symbol. The result of the above may be displayed on another decorative pattern display device 779.

(18) In the above embodiment, the general winning device 639 is provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit 623. The device provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position of is not necessarily limited to the general winning device. For example, a game ball that the flow control unit 623 has received a start winning device (that is, a start winning device related to a special symbol) that is given the right to draw based on the entry, such as the lower middle start winning device 431. It may be configured to be provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position.

(19) In the above embodiment, the case where the entrance (passing port 621) of the upper middle start winning device 632 is provided on the upper side of the distribution portion (first distribution portion) by the roof 611B has been described, but it is not necessarily the case. It is not necessary to provide it at the position, and it may be provided on the side (right side or left side) of the upper middle start winning device 632 corresponding to the downstream side of the distribution part by the roof 611B, and the number of entrances and exits is limited to one. It may be 2 or more.

(20) In the above embodiment, the two stages 622C and 625 are arranged vertically, but the arrangement of these stages does not necessarily have to be limited to the upper and lower sides, and the stage corresponds to the downstream side of the stage. It is possible to take an appropriate arrangement according to the position of various winning devices such as the starting winning device. Even if the stages 622C and 625 are not arranged vertically, if the game balls distributed by one stage do not enter the corresponding winning device arranged on the downstream side of the stage, the game is played. It is preferable to provide a path that can guide the ball to the other stage.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is interposed between the stages 622C and 625, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage 622C and the stage 625 sandwich the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be arranged without any problem.

(21) In the above embodiment, the two stages 622C and 625 have a rolling surface having a similar shape with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball. The shape does not have to be similar in terms of the rolling behavior of the game ball.

(22) In the above embodiment, the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 both have a configuration in which the rolling surface includes a convex surface and a concave-convex surface composed of concave surfaces arranged on the left and right sides of the convex surface. The shape of the rolling surface in 625 does not necessarily include the uneven surface, and any rolling surface having various shapes can be used as long as it is a rolling surface that functions as a stage in which the game ball rolls while reciprocating left and right. Can be adopted.

(23) In the above embodiment, when the game ball distributed by the upper stage 622C does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the game ball moves into the flow control unit 623, the left game area, and the left warp. By moving the passage 628 to the downstream side by its own weight, it is configured to be guided to the lower stage 625, but as a route for guiding the game ball distributed by the upper stage 622C to the lower stage 625, the game is played. The route is not necessarily limited to the route using the own weight of the ball, and may be the route using a movable body capable of receiving the game ball.

(24) In the above embodiment, among the recesses formed in the upper and lower stages 622C and 625, the ejection directions of the game balls in the middle recesses 622D and 625A are different, but they are formed in the respective stages 622C and 625. The configuration may be such that the discharge directions of the recesses are all the same. The number of recesses formed in the upper and lower stages 622C and 625, respectively, is not limited to the three illustrated in the above embodiment, and an appropriate number such as two or less or four or more can be adopted. Further, the recesses having different discharge directions in the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 are not limited to one place (recesses 622D and 625A) exemplified in the above embodiment, and may be two or more places.

(25) In the above embodiment, the lower middle start winning device 431 arranged on the downstream side of the stage 625 is fixedly provided, whereas the upper middle starting winning device 632 arranged on the downstream side of the stage 622C is provided. Although it is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction, any of these middle-start winning devices 431 and 632 may be fixedly provided, or all may be configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction.

(26) In the above embodiment, the contact sensor 662 is exemplified as a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B. However, if the sensor can detect the game ball, the contact sensor is used. Not limited to this, various sensors such as an optical sensor and a magnetic sensor can be adopted. Similarly, as for the contact sensor 665, various sensors such as an optical sensor and a magnetic sensor can be adopted as long as it is a sensor capable of detecting a game ball.

(27) In the above embodiment, the contact sensor 662 is arranged on each of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B, but the contact sensor 662 is arranged at a position where the game ball entering the stage 622C can be detected. , Not limited to the position exemplified in the above embodiment, an appropriate position can be adopted as the arrangement position of the contact sensor 662. For example, the contact sensor 662 may be provided on the passage before branching from the passage port 621 to the left distribution passage 622A or the right distribution passage 622B. According to such a modification, the number of contact sensors 662 to be installed may be one. Further, a contact sensor may be provided on the stage 622C to detect a game ball that has entered the stage 622C and reached the stage 622C.

Similarly, with respect to the lower stage 625, in the above embodiment, the contact sensor 665 is arranged on the passage near the exit of the left warp passage 628, but at a position where the game ball entering the stage 625 can be detected. If there is, not only the position illustrated in the above embodiment but also an appropriate position can be adopted as the arrangement position of the contact sensor 665. For example, a contact sensor, an optical sensor, or the like may be provided at the entrance of the left warp passage 628 to detect a game ball entering the left warp passage 628. Further, a contact sensor may be provided on the stage 625 to detect a game ball that has entered the stage 625 via the left warp passage 628.

(28) In the above embodiment, when the game ball enters the stage 625, it is necessary to pass through the left warp passage 628, but the game ball distributed by the stage 622C enters the upper middle start winning device 632. If not, the game ball may be configured to be guided to stage 622C by another route other than the left warp passage 628.

(29) In the above embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the movable body 710 is moved and the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is moved. However, it is suggested that the possibility of entry occurs by moving one of the movable body 710 and the decorative symbol Z without moving both of them. It may be configured to be used.

(30) In the above embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the movable body 710 is moved upward on the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located. However, the moving direction of the movable body 710 is not necessarily limited to the side on which the upper middle start winning device 632 is located. For example, when such an approach possibility occurs, the movable body 710 may be moved in a predetermined direction to indicate the possibility. The same applies to the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z.

(31) In the above embodiment, the moving direction of the movable body 710 when the game ball may enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 is set to the direction from the initial position to the variable display position. Not limited to this, the direction may be different from the direction from the initial position to the variable display position.

(32) In the above embodiment, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632 with the movable body 710 having the decorative symbol display device 779 and capable of performing the variable display of the second special symbol. It was diverted as a movable body to be moved when it was used. Instead of this, as a movable body to be moved when the possibility of entry occurs, a dedicated movable body to be moved in such a case may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body 710 located at the intermediate position or the like is configured to overlap the decorative symbol display device 479, but the movable body 710 may be configured not to overlap the decorative symbol display device 479 in the moving range. .. That is, the movable body 710 may be configured to be moved without overlapping the decorative symbol display device 479.

(33) In the above embodiment, it is movable depending on whether the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632 or when the second special symbol is variablely displayed using the decorative symbol display device 779. Although the body 710 is arranged at different positions (that is, the intermediate position and the variable display position), the movable body 710 may be arranged at the same position in any case. In such a modification, for example, the movable body 710 is positioned at a predetermined position (for example, a position corresponding to the variable display position) due to the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632. When the second special symbol lottery performed by entering the upper middle start winning device 632 as a result of the possibility of entry is a big hit, and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved. In addition, the movable body 710 may be configured to perform variable display using the decorative symbol display device 779 at the predetermined position without moving the movable body 710.

(34) In the above embodiment, in the above embodiment, there is a case where the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632 and a case where the game ball is distributed by the stage 625 (lower middle starting winning device 431). The movable body 710 is arranged at different positions (that is, the intermediate position and the irradiation position) depending on the possibility that the game ball can enter the game (that is, the movable body 710 is the same in both cases). It may be configured to be arranged at a position.

(35) In the above embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 779 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units 779A arranged in the left-right direction, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative design display device 779 may be composed of one light emitting unit having a shape including a plurality of light emitting bodies and extending in the left-right direction. Alternatively, the decorative design display device 779 may have a configuration in which one or more light emitting units 779A are arranged in various modes. It is preferable that at least a part of the plurality of light emitting units 779A or one light emitting unit having a shape extending in the left-right direction follows the shape of the front view of the gaming machine on the rolling surface of the stage 625.

(36) In the above embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the decorative symbol Z is reduced and moved, but the decorative symbol Z is not reduced. It may be configured to be moved.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position in the decorative symbol display device 479 is placed at an upper position where the movable body 710 does not overlap. The decorative pattern Z is displayed. It is not always necessary that the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position and the decorative symbol Z after movement do not overlap, and the movable body 710 may overlap the decorative symbol Z.

(37) In the above embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the decorative symbol Z is reduced and moved, and the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located on the side (37). That is, although the configuration is such that the arrows 731 and 732 pointing upwards are displayed, if the character points upwards, various characters (for example, a hand pointing upwards and an eyeball pointing upwards) are displayed instead of the arrows 731 and 732. Can be adopted.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arrows 731 and 732 pointing to the upper left or upper right are displayed, but if the arrow points to the side (that is, the upper side) where the upper middle start winning device 632 is located, it points directly above. It may be an arrow. Further, in the above embodiment, the arrows 731 and 732 are displayed on the left and right of the decorative symbol Z, but if the position can point to the side where the upper middle start winning device 632 is located, an appropriate position can be used. It can be used as the display position of arrows 731 and 732.

(38) In the above embodiment, when the game ball may enter the upper middle start winning device 632, the reduced size decorative symbol Z is moved upward to the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479. A region in which the decorative symbol Z is not displayed is formed, and the movable body 710 at the intermediate position is overlapped with the region. Instead of this, in such a case, an arrow or the like indicating the side on which the upper middle start winning device 632 is located may be displayed in the area where the decorative symbol Z is not displayed on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

(39) In the above embodiment, the content of the character 779B is used as information capable of notifying that it is a big hit, but the content of the character 779B can be notified of a specific advantageous result by the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. The content may be something other than a big hit.

(40) In the above embodiment, the character 779B of "this" is adopted as the information capable of notifying that it is a big hit, but it is not necessary to be limited to this, and any character that can notify that it is a big hit is used. For example, various characters can be adopted as the character 779B. For example, the character 779B can adopt a character such as "V" as the character 779B. Information that can be notified as a big hit, such as "this", may be attached to the surface of the light emitting unit 779A in a plane by printing or the like, or is formed by undulations on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A. It may be what is done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the character 779B fixedly formed on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A is used as information capable of notifying that it is a big hit, but the color of the light emitting unit 779A (for example, the color of the cover or the color of light emitted) is used. ) May be information that can notify that it is a big hit. In such a modification, for example, a color filter is arranged in front of the light emitting unit 779A, and the light emitting unit 779A is visually recognized through the color filter so that the player can visually recognize the content that does not indicate that it is a big hit.

(41) In the above embodiment, the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, and the periphery of the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627 is made an opaque region, so that the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627 is passed through the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627. Only a part of the character 779B is visually recognized, whereby the content of the character 779B is visually recognized as a content that is not originally possessed by the character 779B (that is, a content indicating that the character is a big hit). As long as the content of the character 779B can be visually recognized as a content other than the content originally possessed by the character 779B, the configuration is not limited to the configuration illustrated in the above embodiment. For example, by interposing a curved surface of the passage between the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627 and the character 779B to be displayed, the content of the character 779B may be changed and visually recognized by refraction by the curved surface. ..

(42) In the above embodiment, when the movable body 710 is in the irradiation position, the content visually recognized through the entrance 626 is an arrow pointing to the side (that is, downward) of the lower middle start winning device 431 (that is, downward). , "↓")), but when the movable body 710 is in the initial position, the content of the arrow pointing downward is not visually recognized through the discharge port 627. Even when the movable body 710 is in the initial position, the content may be such that the arrow points downward, as in the case where the movable body 710 is in the irradiation position.

(43) In the above embodiment, the entrance 626 and the discharge port 627 are configured as a window portion for changing the content of the character 779B, but a dedicated window portion for changing the content of the character 779B may be provided.

(44) In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the time-saving game state ends when the preset upper limit number of games is reached has been described, but the end condition of the time-saving game state is not necessarily satisfied by the number of games played. It is not necessary, and instead of this, or in addition to this, the time saving game state may be terminated by the satisfaction of other predetermined termination conditions. For example, a time-saving game state in which an end lottery in which an end condition is satisfied with a predetermined end probability (for example, approximately 1/40) for each unit game may be performed for each change may be included. The end probability may be different to a plurality of types to include a plurality of types of time-saving game states having different advantageous degrees. In addition, the configuration may include a type of time-saving game state that continues until the next big hit lottery is won.

(45) In the above embodiment, the short-term time-saving game state is set to one time-saving number of times, but the time-saving number of times does not necessarily have to be one, and may be set to two or more time-saving times. In this case, the number of time reductions in the short-term time-saving game state is preferably configured such that sufficient unit game rights are reserved before the start of the short-term time-saving game state, and is preferably set to the number of hold times or less, and the number of hold times. It is preferable to set it to half (for example, twice) or less of the above, and it is preferable to set it to once.

(46) In the above embodiment, the short-term short-time gaming state is set to a condition in which it is easy to transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player from the start winning of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the special gaming state is set as this setting. Although the configuration in which the average value of the number of time reductions in the time-saving game state transitioning after is set longer than that in the normal gaming state is set longer than the winning in the normal gaming state, it is not always necessary to use this configuration, but the transition to the gaming state advantageous for the player. It is preferable to set other conditions that are easy to use. That is, instead of or in addition to the configuration according to the above embodiment, a large number of acquired balls may be set to be given to the player before returning to the normal gaming state by one big hit winning. In the special game state, the jackpot type with a large number of acquired balls may be easily selected and set, or the transition to the probabilistic game state may be set to facilitate the transition to the game state in which the jackpot is easily won, or the normal game state may be set. A plurality of types of the above settings, which are more advantageous to the player, may be combined and set. In addition, when a plurality of gaming states can occur before returning to the normal gaming state, the number of acquired balls (expected number of acquired balls) as the expected value (average value) in the specifications is one time in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that one big hit winning in at least one of the short-term short-time gaming state and the long-term short-time gaming state is set higher than the big hit winning.

(47) In the above embodiment, the number of time reductions in the time saving game state transitioning after the special gaming state (specifically, the average number of times for one big hit winning that can be counted by the distribution probability of the big hit type) is set to the non-time saving state. Although the setting for changing between the game state and the time saving state and making it different depending on the symbol type has been described, it is not always necessary to have this configuration, and at least one of the gaming state and the symbol type may be a common setting, for example. , The difference in the number of time reductions depending on the symbol type may be eliminated.

(48) In the above embodiment, the case where the first jackpots 1 to 5 and the second jackpots 1 and 2 are set as the jackpot types has been described, but instead of at least a part of these, or at least these In addition to some, other jackpot types with different numbers of acquired balls and times of shortening time may be included.

(49) In the above embodiment, a configuration will be described in which the first special symbol is won in the short-term short-time game state and the long-term short-time state, and the second special symbol is won with a 100% probability of transitioning to the long-time short-time game state. However, it is not always necessary to transition to the long-term short-time gaming state with a 100% probability, and as a part of those winnings, a configuration including a jackpot type that transitions to a gaming state other than the long-term short-time gaming state (for example, short-term short-time gaming state). May be. In this case, it is preferable that the condition in which the jackpot type is selected in the time-saving gaming state is a condition that facilitates the transition to the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as compared with the condition in which the jackpot type is selected in the normal gaming state. In addition, when comparing the condition in which the jackpot type is selected according to the short-term short-time gaming state and the condition in the long-term short-time gaming state, the condition in the long-term short-time gaming state is a condition that makes it easier to transition to a more advantageous gaming state. Is preferable.

(50) In the above embodiment, when the whale roulette variation effect using the common decorative symbol display device 779 is executed as the variation effect during the short-term short-time gaming state related to the start winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a common variation effect may be executed while providing a separate decorative symbol display device for each symbol type, or at least the variation display or the result display may be performed in the common decorative symbol display device. A variation effect in which any of the display modes is different may be executed.

(51) In the above embodiment, the configuration in which a total of two types of symbol types, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are set has been described, but only a single symbol type (for example, only the first special symbol) is described as the symbol type. ), Or three or more symbol types may be set. Further, the number of starting devices for generating a starting prize in each symbol type may be set to 1 or 2 or more. In this case, at least one of the starting devices is provided with an entry control mechanism and a driving means (for example, an approach control solenoid or a motor) that make the ease of entry of the game ball different between the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state. It is preferable that the configuration is such that a state can be generated. For example, the right start winning device 432 and the upper middle start winning device 632 may be omitted, and only the lower middle starting winning device 431 may be configured. In this case, the game ball may be configured with respect to the lower middle starting winning device 431. An approach control mechanism and a driving means may be provided to make the ease of entry different.

Alternatively, the right start winning device 432 may be omitted, and an approach regulating mechanism and a driving means may be provided to make the ease of entry of the game ball different from the upper middle starting winning device 632. In this case, the game ball enters the passage port 621 from the roof 611B as the first distribution portion as an entry control mechanism that makes the ease of entry of the game ball different from the upper middle start winning device 632. The size of the passage port 621 may be switched to a plurality of stages so that the ease of use may be different so that a time-saving game state can be generated. Another entrance is provided in the section on the downstream side and upstream of the second start winning switch 642 (for example, a game ball passing on the inclined surface of the flow control unit 623 can enter), and the entrance is provided. The size may be switched to a plurality of stages so that a time-saving game state can be generated.

(52) In the above embodiment, the case where the big hit lottery is performed with a winning probability of about 1/23 for the starting prize of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been described, but it is set to another winning probability. Alternatively, the winning probability may be set differently for each symbol type. When it is set to win with the same probability in a plurality of symbol types, it is preferable to share at least a part of the controls, such as sharing the counter used for the lottery, because the control can be simplified. In this case, as the probability of transitioning to the long-term short-time game state, it is necessary to win the big hit lottery twice in a row for the start prize of the first special symbol, and from the viewpoint of maintaining the player's willingness to continue playing. It is preferable to set the winning probability to a high probability, it may be set to a winning probability higher than about 1/50, and it is more preferable to set it to a higher probability than about 1/30, and it is set to about 25 minutes. It is preferable to set the probability higher than 1.

Further, as a display showing the winning / failing result of the big hit lottery related to the start winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the plurality of light emitting units 779A is apparently corresponding to the high probability of winning. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it is easy to win, it is preferable that it is less than the reciprocal of the winning probability, it is preferably 70% or less of the reciprocal of the winning probability, and it is preferable that it is 50% or less. Further, the number of the plurality of light emitting units 779A is preferably configured so as not to be significantly different from the winning probability in appearance, and is less than the reciprocal of the winning probability but preferably about 20% or more, which is the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is preferably 30% or more, and preferably 40% or more. In the above embodiment, 11 cases corresponding to about 48% of about 23 corresponding to the reciprocal of the winning probability of about 1/23 are illustrated.

(53) In the above embodiment, the maximum permissible number of game balls entering the right-starting winning device 432 in the time-saving state is set to the same number as the time-saving number of times in the short-time time-saving game state, but it is set to be larger than the time-saving number of times. However, when the number of time reductions in the short-term time reduction game state is two or more, it is preferable to set it less than the number of time reductions. In this case, by controlling the time saving state on the main control board 920, it is possible to set a number that matches the time saving number in the short time saving game state or is less than the time saving number as the maximum entry allowable number in the short time saving game state. It is preferable because it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the game ball is allowed to enter the device 432 more than the number of times shortened.

(54) In the above embodiment, when the entry of the maximum number of game balls allowed to enter is detected by the start switch 446 after the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowed posture, the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach prohibited posture, and the subsequent posture is changed. The configuration of refusing the entry of the game ball has been described, but instead of this, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the same number of game balls (for example, one) as the number of time reductions in the short-term time-saving game state are set to the allowed entry posture. The right approach control mechanism 452 is supported by the entrance portion of the right start winning device 432, and the subsequent game ball is configured to come into contact with the supported game ball and be guided in another direction, and the maximum allowable entry time. The right-starting winning device 432 may take an entry-prohibited posture when the above is elapsed, and only a few supported game balls may enter the right-starting winning device 432.

(55) In the above embodiment, the variable start setting is set as the timing for turning off the time saving state flag and changing the control of the main control board 920 for the right start winning device 432 when the time saving gaming state is entered. Although the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation has been described as an example, the change timing may be another timing, may be before the start of the fluctuation, or after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation (for example, 0.5 seconds). Later) may be used. In this case, even if the time saving state flag is turned off when a start prize is generated for the execution of the unit game of the time before the fluctuation display of the times when the maximum number of games in the time saving game state is reached. It is preferable that the start winning of the second special symbol by winning the right starting winning device 432 can be easily matched with the maximum number of games.

(56) In the above embodiment, as the operation notification control, a configuration for outputting information that can be identified by the player's sense using the device provided in the pachinko machine 100 has been described, but instead of or this In addition, the external output terminal that can output information to devices such as hall computers connected to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 supports left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and launch-free information output. It may be configured to output separate information to the outside.

(57) In the above embodiment, the configuration in which three types of operation notifications are set, left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and launch-unnecessary information output, has been described, but at least a part of them is omitted. Alternatively, other types of information output such as information output corresponding to a game method that may be either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be added.

(58) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on the condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems, effects, and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
A first unit having an entry portion (passage port 621) through which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter, and having the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area closer to the entrance of the gaming area in front view of the gaming machine. (Roof 611B) and a distribution unit (roof 611B) that distributes to the side of the pachinko machine or the second side that is far from the entrance of the gaming area in the front view of the gaming machine.
A specific game area (from the left side to the downstream side with respect to the central structure 420) formed on the first side with respect to the distribution portion of the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution portion. The first path (right flow passage 653, flow control unit 623) that guides to the lower middle start winning device 431 (left game area) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening.

In such a conventional gaming machine, various measures have been taken regarding the movement path of the gaming ball in order to improve the interest of the game by the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. For example, there is a gaming machine that structurally changes the movement path of a gaming ball by providing a distribution portion for distributing the gaming ball to the left and right above the central structure arranged in the center of the gaming board (for example, special feature). Kai 2004-254955 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2004-254955).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, although the movement path of the gaming ball is diversified, the behavior of the gaming ball distributed by the distribution portion moves to the downstream side, such as the gaming ball distributed to the right flowing down the right side as it is. It also affects the flow position of the game ball. For this reason, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and the launch operation of the player is likely to be limited so that a large number of game balls flow down on one side where benefits related to the game are likely to be given. It lacked unexpectedness.

On the other hand, in the game machine described in the feature 10, the game balls structurally distributed by the distribution unit can be moved by a movement route suitable for improving the interest of the game. That is, since the game ball distributed by the distribution unit to the side far from the entrance of the game area (second side) can be moved to the side closer to the entrance of the game area (first side), the player. The target position is diversified by the launch operation, and it is possible to give it unexpectedness. Further, even if the firing operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the second side, the game balls can be returned to the first side, so that the player can enter the approach portion from the first side. It is possible to give the privilege of the game in a specific game area even if many game balls are flowed down aiming at the approach to the approach portion from the second side as well as aiming at. This makes it possible to suitably improve the enjoyment of the game.

The "first side" and "second side" in feature 10 change depending on the side of the gaming machine provided with the entrance of the gaming area. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side in the game area is on the "first side". Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the "second side".

Similarly, the "specific gaming area" in feature 10 also changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the "specific game area" is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left side game). Area).

<Feature 11>
The gaming machine according to feature 10.
A game characterized in that a second path (left flow passage 652, flow control unit 623) for guiding a game ball distributed to the first side by the distribution unit to the specific game area is provided. Machine.

In recent years, due to the increase in size of the central structure and the like, the size and arrangement of the area where the game ball flows down in the game area tends to be limited. On the other hand, in the game machine described in the feature 11, both the game ball distributed to the first side and the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit have a common game area (distribution). Since it is possible to guide the player to a specific game area formed on the first side of the unit, the limited game area can be effectively utilized.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11.
On the downstream side of the specific gaming area, a first advantageous area (lower middle start winning device 431), which is an area that gives an advantageous privilege as compared with the case of not passing when passing, is provided. A gaming machine featuring.

In the game machine according to the feature 12, even if the game ball is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, the game ball is placed on a side different from the second side with respect to the distribution unit (second side). In the game area (specific game area) formed on the side of 1), it is possible to pass the first advantageous area arranged on the downstream side of the specific game area. Therefore, the player may pass the game ball game ball through the first advantageous area with respect to the game ball distributed to the side different from the side where the first advantageous area is provided by the distribution unit. You can have the expectation that there isn't. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved more preferably.

In addition, the "privilege that is advantageous compared to the case of not passing when passing" in the feature 12 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on passing, and the addition of game value such as a prize ball. .. The right of various lottery given based on passing is, for example, the right of the first special symbol lottery given based on passing (entering) the lower middle start winning device 431.

<Feature 13>
The gaming machine according to feature 12,
The distribution portion is a second advantageous region (upper side) that is a region through which the game ball entered by the approaching portion can pass, and is a region that gives an advantageous privilege when the ball passes, as compared with the case where the ball does not pass. Equipped with a medium start winning device 632)
The first path is characterized in that when the game ball is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit without entering the approach portion, the game ball is guided to the specific game area. A game machine to play.

With the gaming machine described in feature 13, when the gaming ball is launched so as to aim at entering the approaching portion from the second side, the gaming ball does not enter the approaching portion and passes through the second advantageous region. Even if the opportunity is lost, the game ball is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, so that there is a possibility of passing to the first advantageous area. As a result, the disappointment of the player due to the loss of the opportunity to enter the second advantageous area can be reduced, and in that respect as well, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature 14>
The gaming machine according to feature 13.
A third path in which the gaming ball that has passed through the approach portion passes through the second side from the position of the second advantageous region without passing through the second advantageous region and joins the first path. A gaming machine characterized by having a path (recess 622D, recess 622F).

In the gaming machine according to the feature 14, even if the gaming ball has entered the approaching portion but has not passed through the second advantageous region, the gaming ball passes through the third path. Can join the first path. As a result, the player can expect that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous area even if the game ball cannot be passed through the second advantageous area.

In particular, since the third route is a route that passes through the second side from the position of the second advantageous region and joins the first route, the player is surprised at the movement route of the game ball. At the same time, it is possible to expect that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous region with respect to the game ball moving by the unexpected route. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved more preferably.

Further, in a conventional typical gaming machine, when the gaming ball that has entered the approaching portion does not pass through an advantageous region such as the second advantageous region, the gaming ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. .. On the other hand, in the game machine according to the feature 14, even if the game ball that has entered the approach portion does not pass through the second advantageous region, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Without having to, again, the chance of passing to the first advantageous area is given. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the game ball that has entered the approaching portion does not pass through the second advantageous region, and in that respect as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature 15>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 12 to 14.
The distribution portion is provided at a position where at least a part of the distribution portion overlaps the first advantageous region in the vertical direction in the front view of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first path is provided between the distribution unit and the first advantageous region.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 15, the gaming ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit moves in the first path and is guided to a specific gaming area, and then becomes the first advantageous area. The route leading to the route can be a route such as an approximately S-shape. Therefore, the player can move the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit to the first advantageous region, which is completely different from the simple flow path. You can clearly be aware of the movement route. As a result, even if the player fires the game ball aiming at a side away from a specific game area, the player fires while clearly grasping that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous area. You can perform operations.

<Feature 16>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 13 to 15.
A lottery means for drawing whether or not to generate the advantageous gaming state when the game ball passes through at least one of the first advantageous region or the second advantageous region.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a display device that displays identification information according to the result of lottery by the lottery means between the distribution unit and the first advantageous region in front view of the gaming machine. ..

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 16, since the display device is provided between the distribution unit and the first advantageous region in the front view of the gaming machine, the player can use the distribution unit to make the gaming ball second. When the pachinko ball is distributed to the side, while following the movement path of the pachinko ball, when the pachinko ball passes through the first advantageous region, the line of sight is raised upward from the position of the first advantageous region. It is possible to visually recognize the identification information according to the result of the lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first advantageous area. After confirming the state of the display device, the player can further visually recognize how the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit located above the display device, so that the player can visually recognize the state of the game balls. It is possible to prevent the line of sight from being distracted.

<Feature 20>
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
When the game ball is received, the game ball is received from the first side, which is closer to the entrance of the game area in the front view of the game machine, or far from the entrance of the game area in the front view of the game machine. It is provided with a flow control unit (flow control unit 623) that moves to the second side, which is the side, and guides the player to a specific game area (the left game area including the general winning device 639).
The specific game area includes an advantageous area (general winning device 639) that gives an advantageous privilege when the player passes the game as compared with the case where the player does not pass the game.
The flow control unit is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit to the specific game area differs depending on the position where the game ball is received.
The advantageous region is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous region is provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position of the gaming ball received by the flow regulation unit.

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening.

In such a conventional gaming machine, various measures have been taken regarding the movement path of the gaming ball in order to improve the interest of the game by the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. For example, there is a gaming machine that structurally changes the movement path of a gaming ball by providing a distribution portion for distributing the gaming ball to the left and right above the central structure arranged in the center of the gaming board (for example, special feature). Kai 2004-254955 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2004-254955).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the movement path of the game ball is diversified, but the movement path is merely for changing the movement direction, and the game when the game is discharged from the movement path. The behavior of the sphere was not considered. Further, the entry of the game ball into the advantageous area is easily determined by the arrangement of the flow-down changing member such as a nail provided in the vicinity of the advantageous area, and the behavior of the game ball at a position away from the advantageous area affects the entry into the advantageous area. Since there is little to do, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to be interested only in the behavior of the game ball in a part of the game area.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 20, the flow control unit receives the gaming ball on the side closer to the entrance of the gaming area (first side) or the side far from the entrance of the gaming area. Move to (second side) to guide to a specific game area. The flow control unit is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit to the specific game area differs depending on the position where the game ball is received. Then, in the specific game area, the advantageous area that gives an advantageous privilege when it passes compared to the case where it does not pass is located at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit. It is provided. Thereby, the possibility that the player can receive an advantageous privilege can be changed according to the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the game of moving the game ball at the flow control unit, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The "first side" and "second side" of the feature 20 change depending on the side of the gaming machine provided with the entrance of the gaming area. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side in the game area is on the "first side". Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the "second side".

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20.
A gaming machine characterized in that the flow control portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines downward from one of the first side or the second side toward the other.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 21, since the flow control portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines from one side to the other, the potential energy of the game ball that rolls on the flow control part by its own weight is discharged. The farther it is, the higher it is. As a result, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit to the specific game area can be changed.

In addition, the "privilege that is advantageous compared to the case of not passing when passing" in the feature 21 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on passing, and the addition of game value such as a prize ball. .. The awarding of game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21.
It has an approach portion through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and has a distribution unit for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to the first side or the second side.
The flow control unit is provided below the distribution unit in front view of the gaming machine, receives the game ball distributed to the first side or the second side by the distribution unit, and receives the game ball. A gaming machine characterized by guiding the player to the specific gaming area.

With the gaming machine described in feature 22, the gaming balls distributed by the distribution unit can be discharged to a specific gaming area via the flow control unit.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to feature 22.
The flow control portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines downward from the second side toward the first side.
The specific gaming area is a region formed on the first side of the distribution portion (a left gaming region including a lower middle start winning device 431 from the left side to the downstream side of the central structure 420). And
The flow control unit receives the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit on the second side from the center of the inclined portion, and receives the game ball on the first side by the distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the distributed gaming balls are received on the first side from the center of the inclined portion.

In the game machine described in feature 23, even if the game ball is distributed to the side (second side) far from the entrance of the game area by the distribution unit, the game ball is shaken by the flow control unit. It is possible to obtain the possibility of passing to an advantageous region provided in a gaming region (specific gaming region) formed on the side closer to the entrance (first side) with respect to the branch portion. Therefore, since the target position can be diversified by the launching operation of the player, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit.

Further, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit to the specific game area may be different depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the first side or the second side by the distribution unit. can. That is, there is a possibility that the player can obtain an advantageous privilege depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the first side or the second side according to the position where the advantageous area is provided. Can be changed. In this respect as well, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit.

The "specific gaming area" in feature 23 changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the "specific game area" is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left side game). Area).

<Feature 24>
The gaming machine according to feature 23.
In the advantageous region, when the flow control unit receives a game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, the flow regulation unit is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is installed at a position where it is more likely to pass than when it receives a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 24, the player can increase the possibility of passing to the advantageous area by performing the firing operation aiming at the position so that the gaming machine can be distributed to the second side by the distribution unit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in launching a game ball aiming at a predetermined position.

<Feature 30>
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
Decorative parts (decorative bodies 612A, 613A) that are configured so that the back side can be seen and are decorated by emitting light.
A game ball passage (left flow passage 652, right flow passage 653) formed on the back side of the decorative portion, and
In the game ball passage, at least one passage display portion (protrusions 612D, 613D) extending along the continuous direction of the game ball passage, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening.

In such a conventional gaming machine, various measures have been taken regarding the movement path of the gaming ball in order to improve the interest of the game by the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. For example, a game in which a warp path for guiding a game ball from the outside to the inside of a central structure arranged in the center of the game board is provided, and the game ball is guided to a stage that can be guided to a starting device using the warp path. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-254955).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, since the warp path is provided inside or on the back side of the central structure, it is difficult to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the game ball enters the warp path, the player loses sight of the game ball and cannot confirm its whereabouts. Therefore, the player may not be able to enjoy the game even for a period of time due to the distrust that the game ball may not come out of the warp path and the frustration of not being able to confirm it.

To solve such a problem, it is conceivable to make the central structure transparent so that the warp passage can be seen. However, in recent years, gaming machines that decorate the central structure by emitting light from a light emitting body provided inside the machine have become mainstream. Therefore, even if the central structure is made transparent, the player tends to lose sight of the position of the warp path due to the light that decorates the central structure, and accordingly, the game ball passing through the warp path also easily loses sight. The problem remains unsolved.

On the other hand, in the game machine described in the game machine 30, a passage display portion extending along the continuous direction of the game ball passage is provided in the game ball passage formed on the back side of the decorative portion. Even if the decorative portion is decorated by emitting light, the player can easily grasp the game ball passage before the start of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust of the game ball that has entered the game ball passage, so that the player can enjoy the game that is started by entering the game ball into the game ball passage. .. This makes it possible to suitably improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30.
A game machine characterized in that a plurality of passage display units are arranged in a direction intersecting with a continuous direction of the game ball passage.

In the game machine according to the feature 31, since a plurality of passage display units are provided side by side in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the game ball passage, the player can use the plurality of passage display units to display the game ball. It is easier to grasp the passage.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31.
The decorative portion has a decorative undulating surface formed on the front side of the decorative portion and a streak-shaped protrusion (projection portion 612D, formed on the back side of the decorative portion) extending along the continuous direction of the game ball passage. With 613D)
The passage display portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the passage display portion is composed of the streak-shaped protrusions.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 32, the decorative undulating surface formed on the front side of the decorative portion provides a high degree of decorativeness, while the protrusion formed on the back side provides good visibility of the game ball passage. Can be secured. That is, it is possible to achieve both decorativeness and good visibility of the game ball passage.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 32.
The game ball passage includes a back surface of the decorative portion and a passage surface facing the back surface, and is a passage that is connected in the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized in that a recess corresponding to the protrusion is formed on the passage surface at a position where the streak-like protrusion is formed.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 33, the passage path of the game ball passage can be configured as a path meandering along the concave portion instead of a vertical drop by the path formed between the protrusion and the concave portion. In such a meandering portion, the speed of the game ball passing through the game ball passage can be reduced.

<Feature 34>
The gaming machine according to the feature 33.
A gaming machine characterized in that the streaky protrusions are formed so that the height of the decorative portion from the installation surface gradually increases from the end portion of the protrusion toward the inside.

In the game machine according to the feature 34, since the meandering portion formed by the protrusion and the recess in the game ball passage can be made gentle, the game ball can be moved into the passage by meandering the game ball passage. It is possible to prevent clogging.

<Feature 35>
The gaming machine according to feature 33 or 34.
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of each section extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage in the direction intersecting the continuous direction, which is partitioned by the protrusions, is narrower than the width of the game ball.

In the game machine according to the feature 35, the length of each section extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage, which is divided by the protrusions, in the direction intersecting the continuous direction is narrower than the width of the game ball. , The game ball can be passed along each section extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage. As a result, the game ball passing through the game ball passage is rectified, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged in the passage.

<Feature 36>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 30 to 35.
A first unit having an entry portion (passage port 621) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a game ball flowing down the game area, which is closer to the entrance of the game area in front view of the game machine. (Roof 611B) is provided, and a distribution portion (roof 611B) for allocating to the side or the second side far from the entrance of the game area is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball passage is a passage for game balls distributed by the distribution unit.

With the gaming machine described in the feature 36, the gaming balls sorted by the distribution unit can enter the gaming ball passage. The player can grasp the whereabouts of the game balls after being sorted by the sorting section by using the passage display section.

The "first side" and "second side" of the feature 36 change depending on the side of the gaming machine provided with the entrance of the gaming area. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side in the game area is on the "first side". Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the "second side".

<Feature 37>
The gaming machine according to feature 36.
A game ball is provided on the downstream side of the game ball passage through which the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit is passed, and the game ball is viewed from the second side to the first side in the front view of the game machine. A specific gaming area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution portion (including a lower middle start winning device 431 from the left side to the downstream side with respect to the central structure 420) by moving toward. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a flow control section (flow control section 623) that guides the player to the left game area).

In the game machine described in the game machine 37, the game balls distributed by the distribution unit to the side far from the entrance of the game area (second side) pass through the game ball passage and the flow control unit, and then the game ball of the game area. You will be guided to a specific gaming area formed on the side closer to the entrance (first side). In such a case, the game balls will pass through a relatively long route before entering a specific game area after being sorted by the distribution unit. However, due to the presence of the passage display unit, the player can perform the above-mentioned As described above, it is easy to grasp the game ball passage before the start of the game (that is, before the game ball enters a specific game area). As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from feeling distrust of the game ball that has entered a relatively long path until reaching a specific game area, including the game ball passage.

The "specific gaming area" in feature 37 changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the "specific game area" is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left side game). Area).

<Feature 38>
The gaming machine according to feature 37.
The flow control portion is configured as an inclined portion that inclines downward from the second side toward the first side, receives the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage, and receives the game ball. Then, there is one that moves to the first side and guides to the specific game area.
The specific game area includes an advantageous area (lower middle start winning device 431) that gives an advantageous privilege when the player passes the game as compared with the case where the player does not pass the game.
The flow control unit is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit differs depending on the position where the game ball is received.
The advantageous region is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous region is provided at a position where the passability differs depending on the position of the gaming ball received by the flow regulation unit.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 38, the flow control unit receives the gaming ball that has passed through the gaming ball passage, and from the receiving position, the flow control unit is closer to the entrance of the gaming area (first side). ) To guide you to a specific game area. The flow control unit is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow control unit to the specific game area differs depending on the position where the game ball is received. Then, in the specific game area, the advantageous area that gives an advantageous privilege when it passes compared to the case where it does not pass is located at a position where the possibility of passing differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow control unit. It is provided. In this way, the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage has a different possibility that the player can receive an advantageous privilege depending on the position of the flow control unit that has received the game ball. , The game in which the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage is moved by the flow control section can be enjoyed, and thereby it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the "privilege that is advantageous compared to the case of not passing when passing" in the feature 38 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on passing, and the addition of game value such as a prize ball. .. The awarding of game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 40>
The game ball is distributed to a plurality of discharge points (recesses 625A to 625C) including at least a place where the first area (lower middle start winning device 431), which is given a predetermined privilege in the game by passing through, is located on the downstream side. Possible first distribution section (stage 625) and
A plurality of discharge points (recesses 622D to The game ball can be distributed to 622F), and the second distribution unit (stage 622C) provided at a position different from the first distribution unit and
With
The first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are a gaming machine characterized by having a rolling surface configured in a shape similar to the rolling behavior of the gaming ball.

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening.

Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with two starting ports to improve the interest of the game. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that aim to further improve the interest by changing the ball entry probability for one of the two starting ports by using the distribution by the stage. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173875).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the ball entry probability for one of the two start ports can be changed by the distribution by the stage, but the distribution contributes to the ball entry probability for the other start port. It's not something to do. Therefore, the player cannot enjoy the playability of sorting by the stage for the start ports other than the specific start port.

On the other hand, in the game machine described in the feature 40, the first area in which the game ball can be distributed toward the first area, which is one of the areas in which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing the machine. A distribution unit is provided, and a second distribution unit that can distribute the game ball toward the second area, which is another area in which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing the ball, is provided. I have. Therefore, the player can enjoy the playability of distribution by the first distribution unit or the second distribution unit for both the first region and the second region, respectively. This makes it possible to suitably improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, since the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit have a rolling surface having a shape similar to that of the rolling behavior of the game ball, the rolling surface of the game ball is rolled on the rolling surface. The dynamic behavior is similar in both distribution parts. Therefore, the player can visually enjoy the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

In addition, the "predetermined privilege in the game" in the feature 40 exemplifies the right of various lottery given based on the passing, the addition of the game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40.
A first display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol that is variablely displayed and displays the lottery result, and
A first path (left warp passage 628) from the side of the first display means to the first distribution section, and
With
Each rolling surface of the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit includes a surface formed substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine, which is a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface.
The first distribution unit is provided below the first display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
The second distribution unit is provided above the first display means in front view of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 41, the first distribution portion and the second distribution portion include a surface formed substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine composed of a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface. Since it has a moving surface, the shape of these distribution portions extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine. In a typical game machine, the first display means is configured so that the length in the left-right direction in the front view of the game machine is longer than the length in the up-down direction and is provided near the center of the game area. By providing the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit having a shape extending in the direction up and down via the first display means, it is preferable to provide a game area for allowing the game ball to flow down in the left-right direction of the first display means. Can be secured in a large size.

At this time, since the first path from the side of the first display means to the first distribution portion is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area provided in the left-right direction with respect to the first display means can be moved. It is possible to guide to the first distribution unit provided below the first display means via one path. Therefore, the game area around the first display means can be effectively used.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 41.
When the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second region, a second path capable of guiding the game ball to the first distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized by having (flow control section 623, left gaming area).

In the game machine according to the feature 42, even if the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second region, the game ball can be played. Since it has a second route that can be guided to one distribution section, the player is given another chance to obtain a predetermined privilege. Therefore, even if the predetermined privilege cannot be obtained as a result of the distribution by the second distribution unit, the disappointment of the player due to the distribution is reduced, and thereby the interest of the game is improved.

Further, when the game ball distributed by the second distribution unit is guided to the first distribution unit through the second path, the player in the first distribution unit is the same as the previous second distribution unit. You will see how the game balls are sorted according to the rolling behavior of. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make the player feel that the chance to obtain the predetermined privilege is obtained again, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "second route" in the feature 42 may include the "first route" or may not include the "first route".

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42.
The game area where the game ball flows down through the predetermined entrance, and
The first side, which has an approach portion through which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the game ball flowing down the game area is closer to the entrance of the game area in the front view of the gaming machine, or A third distribution section (roof 611B) that distributes to the second side, which is the side far from the entrance of the gaming area in the front view of the gaming machine,
A third path (flow control unit) that guides the game ball distributed to the second side by the third distribution unit to a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit. 623) and
With
The second distribution section distributes the game balls that have entered from the entry section.
When the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second region, the game ball joins the third path and joins the third path.
The second path is a gaming machine including the third path that passes after the merging.

In the case of the gaming machine according to feature 43, even though the gaming ball has entered the approaching portion, the gaming ball does not pass through the second region as a result of distribution by the second distribution portion. However, by joining the third route, the player is given another chance to obtain a predetermined privilege. As a result, even if a predetermined privilege cannot be obtained as a result of the distribution by the second distribution unit, the disappointment of the player due to the distribution can be reduced.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the movement path of the gaming ball is structurally changed by providing a distribution portion for distributing the gaming ball to the left and right in the upper part of the central structure arranged in the center of the gaming board. It exists (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-254955). However, in the conventional gaming machine, although the movement path of the gaming ball is diversified, the behavior of the gaming ball distributed by the distribution portion is on the downstream side, such as the gaming ball distributed to the right flowing down the right side as it is. It also affects the flow position of the game ball to. For this reason, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and the launch operation of the player is likely to be limited so that a large number of game balls flow down on one side where benefits related to the game are likely to be given. It lacked unexpectedness.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in feature 43, by providing the third path, the gaming balls structurally distributed by the third distribution section can be moved to a moving path suitable for improving the interest of the game. Can be moved. That is, since the game ball distributed by the third distribution unit to the side far from the entrance of the game area (second side) can be moved to the side closer to the entrance of the game area (first side). The position that the player aims at by the firing operation is diversified, and it is possible to give unexpectedness. Further, even if the firing operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the second side, the game balls can be returned to the first side, so that the player can enter the approach portion from the first side. It is possible to give the privilege of the game in a specific game area even if many game balls are flowed down aiming at the approach to the approach portion from the second side as well as aiming at. Therefore, in that respect as well, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

The "first side" and "second side" of the feature 43 change depending on the side of the gaming machine provided with the entrance of the gaming area. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side) as in the above-described embodiment, the left side in the game area is on the "first side". Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the "second side".

Similarly, the "specific gaming area" in feature 43 also changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, when the exit of the launch passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the "specific game area" is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left side game). Area).

<Feature 45>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 44.
The first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include a surface formed by a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface as the rolling surface.
The plurality of discharge points in the first distribution section and the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution section are provided at positions corresponding to each other on the rolling surface.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the plurality of discharge points in the first distribution section has a different discharge direction from the corresponding discharge points in the second distribution section.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 45, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit have similar rolling behaviors of the game ball on the rolling surface, but at least one corresponding discharge. Since the discharge direction is different at each location, the player can intuitively distinguish the difference between the distribution portions depending on the difference in the discharge direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

<Feature 46>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 45.
The first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include two concave surfaces and a convex surface located between the concave surfaces as the rolling surface.
The first region is a region fixedly provided at a position where a game ball discharged from one or a plurality of specific discharge points can pass among the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit. ,
The second region is a region provided so as to be movable within a range in which game balls discharged from one or a plurality of specific discharge points among the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution portion can pass. A gaming machine characterized by being.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 46, the second region is movably provided within a range in which the gaming balls discharged from the specific discharge points among the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution portion can pass. Since it is a specified area, the probability that the game ball discharged from the specific discharge point passes through the second area is fixedly provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the specific discharge point can pass. It will be lower than when it is done. Therefore, the expectation for passing through the first region or the second region can be different depending on whether the game ball enters the first distribution portion or the second distribution portion. As a result, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

<Feature 47>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 46.
The privilege given when the game ball passes through the second area and the privilege given when the game ball passes through the first area are different in the value that can be expected from each of these benefits. A featured gaming machine.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 47, the expectation for the value can be different depending on whether the gaming ball passes through the first region or the second region. It is possible to avoid the monotony of the game that may be felt because the rolling behavior of the game ball is similar between the distribution part and the second distribution part.

<Feature 50>
A first display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol that is variablely displayed and displays the lottery result, and
A symbol moving means (sub-control board 940) that moves the symbol displayed on the screen in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied.
The first area (lower middle start winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through, and
A second region (upper middle start), which is a region different from the first region and configured to have a lower possibility of passing than the first region, to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through. Winning device 632) and
With
The operating condition is established based on the possibility that the game ball can pass through the second region.
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined direction according to the operating conditions is a direction indicating the side of the second region.

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with two starting ports to improve the interest of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173875).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in a typical conventional gaming machine, since the two starting ports are provided vertically at positions close to each other, the line of sight of the player who follows the flow behavior of the gaming ball while hoping to enter the starting opening. Was limited to a relatively narrow range, and there was a risk that the player would feel monotonous with respect to the game. In response to this problem, it is conceivable to provide the two start ports at positions separated from each other, but since the points of interest are separated, the player's consciousness tends to be biased toward one start port, so that the player can use it. There is a possibility that the ball entering the other starting port will be missed. Entering the ball into the starting opening is an event that triggers a lottery, and is one of the events that give the player an interest. Therefore, the player loses one chance to get a hobby by missing the ball entering the starting port.

On the other hand, in the game machine described in the feature 50, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second region, the game machine is displayed on the screen of the first display means. The symbol is moved in a predetermined direction according to the operating conditions. Therefore, the player can recognize from the movement of the symbol and the direction of movement that the predetermined operating condition, that is, the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region has occurred. As a result, the player does not easily miss the passage of the game ball in the second region, and can preferably obtain the interest of the game ball passing through the second region.

In particular, the symbol that is variablely displayed and displays the lottery result is one of the places where the player is most likely to be conscious, so that the player can catch the movement of the symbol with high probability. Therefore, by moving such a symbol, it is possible to preferably make the player aware that the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region has occurred. Further, since the moving direction of the symbol due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second region is the direction indicating the side of the second region, the player moves his / her line of sight according to the movement of the symbol. Then, one's own line of sight can be naturally directed to the second region. Therefore, the player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second region with a suitable probability.

Here, since the second region has a lower possibility of passing than the first region, the player's expectation for passing is higher than that of the first region. Further, the second region, which is less likely to pass than the first region, is a region where the player can easily take his or her eyes off compared to the first region. On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, since the player can witness the passage of the gaming ball in the second region with a suitable probability, a more suitable interest can be provided to the player.

In addition, the "predetermined privilege in the game" in the feature 50 exemplifies the right of various lottery given based on the passing, the granting of the game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 51>
The gaming machine according to the gaming machine 50.
The first region is provided below the first display means in front view of the gaming machine.
The second region is provided above the first display means in front view of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 51, since the first display means is interposed between the first region and the second region, the player's consciousness about the second region, which is less likely to pass, is easily diminished, and the first The passage of the game ball in the two areas is also more likely to be overlooked. However, even in such a second region, the occurrence of the passability of the game ball is suggested by the fact that the symbol that the player is most conscious of moves in the direction indicating the side of the second region. , The player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second region with a suitable probability.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 50 or 51.
When the game ball passes through the first area, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery as the predetermined privilege is provided.
The symbol is a gaming machine for displaying a lottery result by the lottery means.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 52, the possibility of passing the gaming ball to the second region is generated by using a symbol for displaying the lottery result performed by the gaming ball passing through the first region. Is suggested. Therefore, the expectation for the passage of the game ball to the second region is given to the player at the same time as the expectation for the lottery result performed by the game ball passing through the first region which has nothing to do with the second region. Can be done.

<Feature 53>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 52.
The value that can be expected from the privilege given by the game ball passing through the second area is higher than the value expected from the privilege given by the game ball passing through the first area. A featured gaming machine.

With the gaming machine described in feature 53, the passage of the gaming ball into the second region, which can be expected to have a higher value than the first region, is more likely to be witnessed by the player, which makes it more suitable for the player. Can be provided.

<Feature 54>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 53.
A gaming machine characterized in that it includes a symbol reducing means (sub-control board 940) that reduces the symbol displayed on the screen when the operating conditions are satisfied.

In the game machine 54, the symbol is reduced when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second region. Therefore, after the symbol moves, the symbol on the screen is displayed. The non-display area is formed to a certain size. Therefore, by using the non-display area, another method of moving the symbol (for example, moving the movable body on the non-display area, displaying a character different from the symbol, etc.), the second region It is possible to suggest to the player that the possibility of passing the game ball to the player has occurred.

<Feature 55>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 54.
A movable body (movable body 710) that can move in a predetermined direction within a range including at least a position that overlaps the screen of the first display means.
When the operating conditions are satisfied, the movable body moving means (sub-control board 940) that moves the movable body in a predetermined direction according to the operating conditions at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the game machine according to the feature 55, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region, the movable body is moved in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition (that is, , The direction indicating the side of the second region), so that the player can move the movable body and the moving direction, the position of the second region, and the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region. Can recognize the occurrence of. In particular, since the movable body is moved at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means, the player can visually recognize the movement of the moving body while visually recognizing the movement of the symbol, so that the game ball to the second region can be visually recognized. It is possible to more preferably recognize that the passability of the above has occurred.

<Feature 56>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 55.
A second distribution unit (stage 622C) that distributes the game ball to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the second region is located on the downstream side.
A detection means (contact sensor 662) for detecting a game ball entering the second distribution unit, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that when a gaming ball entering the second distribution unit is detected by the detecting means, the possibility of the gaming ball passing through the second region occurs.

In the gaming machine according to feature 56, when a gaming ball entering the second distribution section is detected by the detecting means, the movable body is moved on the assumption that the gaming ball may pass through the second region. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the second distribution unit. As a result, the player can entertain the game in which the game balls are distributed by the second distribution unit.

<Feature 57>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 56.
The screen of the first display means can display characters and can display characters.
A gaming machine comprising a character display means (sub-control board 940) that displays a character suggesting a predetermined direction according to the operating condition when the operating condition is satisfied.

In the game machine according to the feature 57, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility of the game ball passing through the second region, a predetermined direction according to the operating condition (that is, the second Since a character suggesting a direction indicating the side of the region) is displayed, the player can determine the position of the second region and the possibility of passing the game ball to the second region based on the displayed character. Can be recognized.

<Feature 60>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when the second predetermined condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied, and
A movable body (movable body 710) that can move in a predetermined direction,
A second light emitting unit that is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine in the movable body and can display a variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means by emitting light in a predetermined mode according to the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition. Display means (decorative pattern display device 779) and
The movable body is located at a predetermined initial position, and when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs, the movable body moves from the initial position to one side in the predetermined direction, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is located at a variable display position separated from the initial position on one side in the predetermined direction when the variable display is executed by the second display means.

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173875).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in a conventional typical gaming machine, the player's consciousness tends to be suitable for a display device that displays fluctuations and lottery results, so that the player may miss the entry into the starting port. rice field. Entering the ball into the starting opening is an event that triggers a lottery, and is one of the events that give the player an interest. Therefore, the player loses one chance to get a hobby by missing the ball entering the starting port.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in feature 60, when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition that triggers the lottery by the lottery means occurs, the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction, so that the player Can recognize the occurrence of the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition from the moving direction of the movable body (that is, the predetermined direction). As a result, the player cannot easily overlook the establishment of the second predetermined condition that triggers the lottery by the lottery means, and can preferably obtain the interest of the game in which the lottery is performed by the establishment of the second predetermined condition. In particular, the moving direction of the movable body when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs is the direction in which the movable body moves from the initial position to the variable display position, so that the player can move the movable body in the second predetermined position. You can intuitively recognize that it is related to the fulfillment of the condition.

Further, since the movable body on which the second display means is arranged is diverted as a part indicating that the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition has occurred, it can be seen that the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition has occurred. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated part for suggesting, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In the feature 60, the "second predetermined condition" and the "second display means" may be the "predetermined condition" and the "display means", respectively.

<Feature 61>
In the gaming machine according to feature 60,
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable body is located at an intermediate position closer to the initial position than the variable display position when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 61, when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs, the movable body is located at an intermediate position between the initial position and the variable display position, and thus the position of the movable body. Depending on the situation, the player can be made to distinguish whether the movement of the movable body is performed due to the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied or for performing the variable display by the second display means. can. As a result, the player can preferably recognize that the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition has occurred.

<Feature 62>
The gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61.
It is provided with a second region (upper middle start winning device 632) in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second region is provided on one side of the movable body in the predetermined direction.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 62, the moving direction of the movable body is on the side of the region (second region) related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition, and therefore, when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs. The player's line of sight can be naturally directed to the second region according to the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second region where the second predetermined condition is satisfied with a suitable probability.

<Feature 63>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 60 to 62.
The lottery means draws a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition is satisfied.
The first display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means performed based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is provided.
The movable body is configured to be movable in the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and overlaps the screen at least when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 63, the movable body moves at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means at least when the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition occurs. The screen of the first display means is a part on which a symbol for displaying the lottery result based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is displayed, and is one of the parts where the player is most likely to pay attention. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the movable body that moves at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means, and can preferably recognize that the possibility of satisfying the second predetermined condition has occurred.

<Feature 64>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 60 to 63.
A second region (upper middle start winning device 632) in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through, and
A second distribution unit (stage 622C) that distributes the game ball to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the second region is located on the downstream side.
A detection means (contact sensor 662) for detecting a game ball entering the second distribution unit, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that when a gaming ball entering the second distribution unit is detected by the detecting means, the possibility of the gaming ball passing through the second region occurs.

In the gaming machine according to feature 64, when a gaming ball entering the second distribution unit is detected by the detecting means, the movable body is moved on the assumption that the second predetermined condition may be satisfied. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the distribution of the game balls by the second distribution unit. As a result, the player can entertain the game in which the game balls are distributed by the second distribution unit.

<Feature 65>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 60 to 64.
The first region (lower middle start winning device 431) in which the first predetermined condition is satisfied by passing the game ball, and
A first distribution unit (stage 625) provided within the movable range of the movable body and capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the first region is located on the downstream side.
With
The movable body is a position between the initial position and the variation display position when the game ball is distributed by the first distribution unit, and the second display means is the first distribution unit. It is located at the irradiation position, which is a position where it is possible to illuminate the rolling surface of the game ball in
In the second display means, at least a part of the light emitting portion is arranged in a shape along the rolling surface of the first distribution portion.
The second display means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the movable body is located at the irradiation position, light is emitted regardless of the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition.

In the game machine according to the feature 65, when the game balls are distributed by the first distribution unit, the second display means of the movable body located at the irradiation position is irrespective of the establishment of the second predetermined condition. It emits light. The irradiation position is a position between the initial position and the variation display position, and is a position where the second display means can illuminate the rolling surface of the game ball in the first distribution unit. Therefore, the game ball to be sorted by the first sorting unit rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the second display means. In particular, in the second display means, since at least a part of the light emitting portion is arranged in a shape along the rolling surface of the first distribution portion, the rolling surface of the first distribution portion can be efficiently used. Can illuminate.

Here, since the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit is related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the player pays attention to the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit while expecting the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the second display means, the light illuminating the rolling surface functions as an effect of expecting the player to satisfy the first predetermined condition. As a result, the player's expectation is aroused, and the interest of the game in which the game balls are distributed by the first distribution unit can be suitably improved.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 65, when the movable body is located at the irradiation position, the second display means emits light in a mode different from the predetermined mode in which the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Preferably, this makes it possible to avoid an event that causes the player to misunderstand that the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Feature 70>
When the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery according to the satisfied condition, and
A movable body (movable body 710) that can move in a predetermined direction,
A second light emitting unit that is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine in the movable body and can display a variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means by emitting light in a predetermined mode according to the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition. Display means (decorative pattern display device 779) and
With
The movable body is located at a predetermined initial position, and is located at a variable display position different from the initial position when the variable display is executed by the second display means in response to the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition. ,
The second display means includes a result display unit (character 779B) for notifying that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit).
When the movable body is located at a position different from the variable display position, the display changing means (display changing means) for visually recognizing the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit as the content different from the content corresponding to the result. A gaming machine characterized by having an entrance 626 and an outlet 627).

In a conventional typical gaming machine, a gaming ball launched in response to a player's operation enters a gaming area formed on a gaming board and flows down the gaming area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed according to the entry. Then, it is known that when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can win a prize in the winning opening (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173875).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the variable display and the lottery result are generally displayed on the screen of the display device, and in that respect, there is a limit to the fun that can be given to the player.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 70, the variation display and the lottery result based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition are displayed by using the second display means provided on the movable body that can move in the predetermined direction. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a higher interest than the conventional general gaming machine. Further, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 70, when the movable body is located at a position different from the variable display position, the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit of the second display means is the said. It is visually recognized as different from the content corresponding to the result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the predetermined result has been obtained even though the second display means is not in the situation of displaying the lottery result based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being meaninglessly discouraged due to the misidentification of the lottery result, and thus it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game due to such misidentification.

In the feature 70, the "second predetermined condition" and the "second display means" may be the "predetermined condition" and the "display means", respectively.

<Feature 71>
The gaming machine according to feature 70.
The result display unit includes information corresponding to the predetermined result provided fixedly on the surface.
The display changing means is configured as a window portion (advance entrance 626, discharge port 627) having a predetermined shape located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second display means, and the movable body displays the variation from the initial position. When the position is located at a predetermined position within the range up to the position, at least a part of the result display unit is visually recognized through the window unit, thereby corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the information formed in the result display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the content to be played is visually recognized as content different from the content corresponding to the predetermined result.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 71, by allowing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the result display unit through the window portion having a predetermined shape, the information fixedly formed on the surface of the result display unit can be obtained. The indicated content (that is, the content corresponding to the predetermined result) can be visually recognized as a content different from the content corresponding to the predetermined result. Therefore, misidentification of a predetermined result indicated by the result display unit of the second display means can be realized with a relatively simple configuration without changing the information of the result display unit in a controlled manner.

In the feature 71, "fixedly provided on the surface" may be attached to the surface in a plane by printing or the like, or may be formed by undulations on the surface. good.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 71.
The window portion is an opening on the front side of the gaming machine connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine.
By visually recognizing at least a part of the result display unit from the front side of the opening in the front view of the gaming machine, the display changing means visually recognizes the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit as different content. A gaming machine characterized by letting you play.

In the game machine according to the feature 72, since the window portion is the opening on the front side of the game machine connected to the passage extending in the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine, the opening on the front side of the game machine in the passage of the game ball. Can be diverted as a window. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a window portion that functions as a display changing means exclusively, so that an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Further, by visually recognizing at least a part of the result display unit in front of the opening of the passage of the game ball, the player can pay attention to the passage.

<Feature 73>
The gaming machine described in feature 72,
The first area (lower middle start winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through, and
An approach section (entrance 626) that is opened on the front side of the gaming machine and is connected to a passage that extends in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
A discharge unit (discharge port 627) connected to the passage and discharging the game ball guided from the approach portion through the passage to the upstream side of the first region.
A first distribution unit (stage 625) that distributes the game ball to the approach portion or the outside of the approach portion, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the window portion is the approach portion.

In the game machine according to the feature 73, the window portion is an approach portion into which the game balls distributed by the first distribution portion enter. Since the gaming ball that has entered the approaching section is discharged from the discharging section to the upstream side of the first region, at least a part of the result display section is visually recognized when the entrance is facing from the front side of the gaming machine. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the advantage of having the game ball enter the approaching portion.

In addition, the "predetermined privilege in the game" in the feature 73 exemplifies the right of various lottery given based on the passing, the addition of the game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 74>
The gaming machine described in feature 72,
The first area (lower middle start winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through, and
A discharge unit (discharge port 627) that is opened on the front side of the gaming machine, is connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine, and discharges a game ball passing through the passage to the upstream side of the first region.
The entrance (entrance 626) connected to the passage and
A first distribution unit (stage 625) that distributes the game ball to the approach portion or the outside of the approach portion, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the window portion is the discharge portion.

In the game machine according to the feature 74, the window portion is a discharge portion that discharges the game balls distributed to the approach portion by the first distribution portion to the upstream side of the first region. Therefore, at least a part of the result display unit is visually recognized when the discharging unit is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine, so that the player is made to pay attention to the advantage of discharging the game ball from the discharging unit. Can be done.

In addition, the "predetermined privilege in the game" in the feature 74 exemplifies the right of various lottery given based on the passing, the granting of the game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The awarding of game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general winning device 639.

<Feature 75>
The gaming machine according to feature 73 or 74.
The display changing means is characterized in that the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the information formed in the result display unit is visually recognized as the content indicating the side of the first region, not the content corresponding to the result. A game machine to be.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 75, when the approaching portion or the discharging portion of the first distribution portion faces from the front side of the gaming machine, the content indicating the side of the first region is visually recognized. Therefore, the player can associate the approaching portion or the discharging portion with the first region from the visual content, thereby, the game ball that has entered the approaching portion or the game ball that is discharged from the discharging portion. On the other hand, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the benefits obtained by passing through the first area.

<Feature 80>
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
A lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (starting prize of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (starting prize of the second special symbol) is satisfied.
A display device (special symbol display device 471, 472) capable of performing variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variable display. , Decorative pattern display device 479,779),
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the execution of the variation display for the establishment of the other predetermined condition is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied). Holding means (a part of the main control board 920) that can be held up to 4 times for each of the establishment of
A first starting unit (lower middle starting winning device 431) that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (right start winning device 432), which takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters,
A variable winning section (Chuo University winning device 434) that gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to a player when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry.
One of the game state control means (main control board 920) that generates a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion. Department) and
As the game state,
A normal game state in which the game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting unit, and
A winning easy gaming state (special gaming state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal gaming state.
The result information corresponding to the non-winning (loss) of the predetermined lottery, including one or more variation display executed after the winning easy game state and the display of the result information after the one or more variation display. When the game state transitions to another game state when it is displayed until the predetermined maximum number of games is reached, and the result information corresponding to the winning (big hit) of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information. Is provided with an advantageous gaming state in which a gaming state to be transitioned is determined after the result information is displayed, depending on a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the establishment of the first predetermined condition in the normal gaming state. ,
As the advantageous gaming state, a first advantageous gaming state (short-term time-saving gaming state) and a second advantageous gaming state (long-term time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The game state control means
The normal approach control (control of the right start winning device 432 in the non-time saving state) that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and the normal game during the advantageous game state. It performs easy entry control (control of the right start winning device 432 in a time saving state) that can generate an easy entry state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion from the state.
As the first winning type (big hit type related to the first special symbol) corresponding to the gaming state that transitions when the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined lottery is won.
The winning type (first jackpot 2, 5) that transitions to the first advantageous gaming state according to the first selection condition (selection condition in the non-time saving state) corresponding to the normal gaming state, and
Winning types (first jackpots 1 to 5) for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state are provided according to the second selection condition (selection condition in the time saving state) corresponding to the first advantageous gaming state.
As the second winning type (big hit type related to the second special symbol) corresponding to the gaming state that transitions when the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined lottery is won.
A gaming machine characterized in that a winning type (second jackpot 1, 2) for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state is provided in both the normal gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters the starting opening as a normal game and a big hit is won by a lottery based on the entry, a special gaming state is set, and a large number of gaming balls can win a prize in the winning opening in the special gaming state. The configuration is known. Further, in this type of gaming machine, after the special gaming state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than that of the normal gaming state, or the gaming state in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the starting port than the normal gaming state. It is also known that it is added and diversifies the game.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, whether or not to transition to an advantageous gaming state is determined by the lottery result performed by the entry of the gaming ball into the starting port, so that the transition to the advantageous gaming state is achieved. There is a problem that it tends to be a uniform game such as emphasizing the lottery result for each time.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adding a gaming property of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state by satisfying a plurality of starting conditions. That is, the game ball to the second starting part is provided with the game property of gradually transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state via the first advantageous gaming state by the game ball entering the first starting part a plurality of times. It is possible to add the game property of transitioning to the second advantageous game state by the result of one lottery by the entry of.

Further, if the execution of the variable display is suspended by the holding means in the case of transitioning to the first advantageous gaming state due to the entry of the gaming ball into the first first starting portion, the execution of the variable display is suspended after the winning easy gaming state. It is possible to start a variable display in which the lottery result of whether or not to transition to another game state is displayed as result information by a lottery based on the subsequent entry of the game ball into the first starting unit. In this case, since the gaming state in which the transition is made according to the condition for transitioning to another gaming state from the normal gaming state is determined according to the conditions advantageous to the player, the player can display the variation before the winning easy gaming state. On the other hand, it is possible to give a game property of watching the display of the result information corresponding to the winning with a great expectation for a more advantageous gaming state than when expecting the result information. Therefore, it is possible to add a playability that expands the expectation of gradually transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state.

In addition, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is made via the first advantageous gaming state due to the entry of a plurality of gaming balls into the first starting portion, the result information of whether or not to transition to the second advantageous gaming state is provided. A winning easy game state occurs before the display, and the player can be given a predetermined game value by temporarily entering the variable winning portion during the transition. Therefore, when a non-winning is achieved while expecting a transition to the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game in anticipation of winning the first starting portion again.

Further, when the game transitions to the first advantageous gaming state due to the entry of the game ball into the first first starting portion, if the execution of the variation display is not suspended by the holding means, the game state controlling means is used to enter the winning easy gaming state. Later, the easy approach control can generate an easy entry state in which the game ball can easily enter the second starting portion. For this reason, the player's mood is depressed by promptly executing the variable display that expects the transition to the second advantageous gaming state, proceeding the game smoothly, and spending a lot of time until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be suppressed.

In the description of the feature 80, the first advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state in which the upper limit number of games is set to the first number of times of one or more, and the second advantageous gaming state is the first number of times of the upper limit games. It may be an advantageous gaming state set to a larger number of second times, and thereby starting a plurality of times by a simple control that only makes the initial setting value of the number of times in the advantageous gaming state different depending on the length of the upper limit number of games. It is possible to add a game property that favorably transitions to an advantageous game state when the condition is satisfied.

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80.
Separately from the second starting portion, a third starting portion provided on the upstream side or the downstream side with respect to the first starting portion and satisfying the second predetermined condition is provided.
The lottery means draws lots under the conditions of winning with the same probability in the case where the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state and the case where the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, in a normal gaming state, the player can play a game aiming at the entry of the gaming ball into both the first starting portion and the third starting portion without changing the operation. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously expect the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition in which a lottery with a different transition pattern to the second advantageous gaming state is performed.

<Feature 82>
The gaming machine according to feature 81.
As the display device, it is possible to execute variable display according to a common display mode when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state and when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display device capable of displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery in a common display mode after the variable display.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state can be expressed by a common mode even if different starting conditions are satisfied in different gaming states, so that the transition to the player can be performed. It is possible to clearly show that the possible advantageous gaming states are common. Further, even if one of the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state and the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state with a very low probability, even if it is a rare setting. By satisfying other predetermined conditions, it is possible to experience the mode of variable display in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game is confused without knowing what kind of situation the game is in due to the accidental establishment of a predetermined condition.

<Feature 90>
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
A lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (starting prize of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (starting prize of the second special symbol) is satisfied.
A display device (special symbol display device 471, 472) capable of performing variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variable display. , Decorative pattern display device 479,779),
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the holding means (main control board 920) capable of holding the execution of the variation display for the fulfillment of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times. (Some) and
A first starting unit (lower middle starting winning device 431) that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit (right start winning device 432), which takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters,
A variable winning section (Chuo University winning device 434) that gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to a player when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry.
One of the game state control means (main control board 920) that generates a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion. Department) and
As the game state,
A normal game state in which the game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting unit, and
A winning easy gaming state (special gaming state) including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal gaming state.
The result information corresponding to the non-winning (loss) of the predetermined lottery, including one or more variation display executed after the winning easy game state and the display of the result information after the one or more variation display. When the game state transitions to another game state when it is displayed until the predetermined maximum number of games is reached, and the result information corresponding to the winning (big hit) of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information. Is provided with an advantageous gaming state in which a gaming state to be transitioned is determined after the result information is displayed, depending on a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the establishment of the first predetermined condition in the normal gaming state. ,
The game state control means
An approach normal control that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal gaming state, and an approach normal control in which the game ball enters the second starting portion from the normal gaming state during the advantageous gaming state. It is intended to perform easy entry control that generates an easy entry easy state.
When the variation display of the number of times the maximum number of games is reached is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the approach normal control is used to control the game ball to easily enter the second starting portion. A game machine to play.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters the starting port during a normal gaming state, a starting prize is obtained and a variable display is executed, and a big hit is won by a lottery based on the starting prize, a big hit is won. It is known that a special game state is set after the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, and a large number of game balls can be awarded to the winning opening in the special game state. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning is generated during execution of the variation display based on the start winning, the execution of the variation display for the other start winning can be suspended up to a predetermined maximum number of times. A configuration having a hold function is also known. Further, in this type of gaming machine, after the special gaming state, the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than that of the normal gaming state, or the gaming state is such that the gaming ball is more likely to enter the starting port than the normal gaming state. And the like occur, and it is also known that those game states can be continued up to a predetermined maximum number of games, and the games are diversified.

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there may still be room for improvement in the control of gaming that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing control of a game transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states. That is, in a situation where the variable display of the number of times the maximum number of games is reached is executed in the advantageous game state, the control for generating a state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion is not the easy approach control but the normal approach control. Is selected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the entry of the game ball into the second starting unit during the execution of the variation display of the number of times the maximum number of games has been reached. It is possible to easily suppress the number of game balls entering the game. Therefore, when it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting portion than in the first starting portion to transition to a gaming state that is extremely advantageous to the player, the game between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is performed. It is possible to preferably transition between game states in a situation where there is a difference in the state transition conditions.

<Feature 91>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90,
As the advantageous gaming state, a first advantageous gaming state (short-term time-saving game) set to the first upper limit number of games that is the same as or less than the maximum number of times that the execution of the variation display can be held by the holding means. State) is provided,
As the easy-to-enter control, the gaming state control means generates the easy-to-enter state when a predetermined easy-to-enter condition (winning of a normal symbol lottery) is satisfied, and after the easy-to-enter state is generated, the first 2 When the entry of the same number of game balls as the first upper limit number of games is detected into the starting portion, the transition is made to the entry prohibited state in which the entry of the game balls into the second starting portion is prohibited, and the entry prohibited state is entered. After the transition to, the gaming machine is characterized in that the approach normal control is used to control the gaming ball to easily enter the second starting portion.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, a sufficient unit game right can be reserved before the start of the first advantageous gaming state, so that the game ends after the transition to the first advantageous gaming state. It is possible to generate a situation in which it is not necessary to enter the game ball into the game area during the period up to. Therefore, in the first advantageous gaming state, the player can concentrate his / her consciousness on the variable display and the display of the result information during execution without the operation of entering the game area into the game area, and the second advantageous game state. It is possible to easily raise the expectation of the transition to the gaming state.

Further, in the situation where the variable display of the number of times when the upper limit number of games is reached is executed in the first advantageous game state, the second starting portion is controlled by the approach normal control, so that the approach operation of the game ball into the game area can be performed. Even if it is not executed, the player is less likely to suffer a disadvantage, and it is possible to easily ensure fairness among the players depending on whether or not the approach operation is executed.

In the description of the feature 91, it is preferable to set the first upper limit number of games to one, and if the execution of the variable display is suspended by the holding means even for one game, the first advantageous game state is set. It is possible to secure the right to the unit game required by the end, and it is possible to easily set the winning conditions of a predetermined lottery for each one. Therefore, the length of the first advantageous gaming state can be aggregated in a short period of time, and the expectation of the transition to the second advantageous gaming state in the first advantageous gaming state can be maximized.

Further, instead of the description of the easy entry control in the feature 91, the game state control means sets the first maximum number of games as the easy entry control when a predetermined easy entry condition (winning of the normal symbol lottery) is satisfied. The easy-to-enter state may be generated with the same number of game balls as the maximum permissible number of entry balls.

<Feature 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or 91,
When the short-term time-saving gaming state is started, the gaming state control means is holding the execution of the variation display for the upper limit number of games constituting the advantageous gaming state by the holding means, the time-saving state. After starting, the easy approach control causes one game ball to transition to the non-time saving state in a short time when it cannot enter the second starting portion, and the normal approach control allows the game ball to enter the second starting portion. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to generate an easy-to-use state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the execution of the variation display for the upper limit number of games constituting the advantageous gaming state is suspended by the holding means at the timing when the short-term short-time gaming state is started, it is easy to enter. Depending on the control, the gaming ball cannot enter the second starting portion. For this reason, it is easy for the player to easily suffer a disadvantage even if the game ball does not enter the game area in the short-term short-time game state, and the expectation of the transition to the second advantageous game state is expected. Can be easily increased.

<Feature A0>
A game area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and a player can change and operate a flow-down start position in the game area. The game area has a predetermined first operation state (a predetermined first operation state by the player). The first flow-down area (the flow-down area on the left side of the central structure 420) through which the game ball flows down due to the left-handed game state) and the first flow-down area are different from the first operation state. 2 A gaming machine provided with a second flow-down area (flow-down area on the right side of the central structure 420) through which the game ball flows down depending on the operating state (right-handed game state).
A lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (starting prize of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (starting prize of the second special symbol) is satisfied.
A display device (special symbol display device 471, 472, which can display a variation when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and display result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result after the variation display. Decorative pattern display device 479,779) and
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the execution of the variation display for the establishment of the other predetermined condition is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied). Holding means (a part of the main control board 920) that can be held up to 4 times for each of the establishment of
A first starting unit (lower middle starting winning device 431) provided in the first flow-down region and satisfying the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit provided in the second flow-down region, having a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied when the game ball enters.
A variable winning section (Chuo University winning device 434) that gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to a player when a game ball enters in a plurality of states having different ease of entry.
One of the game state control means (main control board 920) that generates a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion. Department) and
In each game state controlled by the game state control means, the operation instruction information output means (one of the main control board 920) for outputting the operation instruction information corresponding to the execution of the game in the first operation state or the second operation state. A unit, a decorative pattern display device 479, a light emitter of the central structure 420, and an acoustic device 281,282).
As the game state,
A first-side gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the first flow-down region flow down than the second flow-down region.
The easy-to-win game state including the period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won, and the easy-to-win game state.
The result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined, including one or more variation display executed after the winning easy game state and the display of the result information after the one or more variation display. The first when the game state transitions to the first side game state when displayed until the maximum number of games is reached and the result information corresponding to the winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information. An advantageous gaming state is provided in which a gaming state to be transitioned is determined after the result information is displayed, depending on a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player from the establishment of the first predetermined condition in the side gaming state. ,
The operation instruction information output means
A first operation instruction information output means for outputting the first operation instruction information corresponding to the execution of the game in the first operation state during the first side game state.
A second operation instruction information output means that outputs second operation instruction information corresponding to the execution of the game in the second operation state during the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state.
Before the end of the special gaming state or before the end of the advantageous gaming state, the execution of the variation display for the remaining number of times or more required to reach the upper limit number of games in the advantageous gaming state that transitions thereafter is described. A gaming machine comprising a second operation instruction non-output means that generates a period during which the second operation instruction information is not output when the pachinko machine is held by the holding means.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters the starting port during a normal gaming state, a starting prize is obtained and a variable display is executed, and a big hit is won by a lottery based on the starting prize, a big hit is won. It is known that a special game state is set after the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, and a large number of game balls can be awarded to the winning opening in the special game state. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning is generated during execution of the variation display based on the start winning, the execution of the variation display for the other start winning can be suspended up to a predetermined maximum number of times. A configuration having a hold function is also known. Further, in this type of gaming machine, after the special gaming state, the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than that of the normal gaming state, or the gaming state is such that the gaming ball is more likely to enter the starting port than the normal gaming state. And the like occur, and it is also known that those game states can be continued up to a predetermined maximum number of games, and the games are diversified.

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is preferable that the gaming machine maker side makes the player preferably recognize the operation related to the game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states, and there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making a player preferably recognize an operation related to a game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states. That is, before the end of the special gaming state or before the end of the advantageous gaming state, the holding means suspends the execution of the variation display for the remaining number of times or more required to reach the maximum number of games in the advantageous gaming state. Already, a predetermined condition for the variation display required until the player finishes the advantageous gaming state without playing the game in the second operating state is satisfied. In this case, since the second operation instruction non-output means generates a period in which the second operation instruction information is not output, the player aims to execute more variable displays than necessary for executing the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which an extra game ball is consumed.

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine described in feature A0.
The second operation of outputting the second operation instruction prohibition information for at least not executing the game in the second operation state during the period when the second operation instruction non-output means does not output the second operation instruction information. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with prohibited information output means.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, it is possible to clearly show to the player that it is not necessary to execute the game in the second operating state.

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to A1 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: A launch operation means operated by a player, a game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a passage portion. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and gives a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each of the gaming parts.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

100 ... Game machine, 281,282 ... Sound device, 431 ... Lower middle start winning device, 432 ... Right starting winning device, 434 ... Central grand prize device, 471, 472 ... Special symbol display device, 479, 779 ... Decorative symbol Display device, 611B: Roof, 612A, 613A ... Decorative part, 612D, 613D ... Protrusion part, 620 ... Passage port, 622C ... Stage, 623 ... Flow control part, 639 ... General prize device, 652 ... Left flow passage, 653 ... Right flow passage, 652A, 653A ... concave, 920 ... main control board

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is used to solve the above-mentioned problems.
A gaming area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided , and a player can change and operate the flow-down start position in the game area. The game area is set by a predetermined first operation state by the player. A gaming machine provided with a left-side flow-down area in which the game ball flows down and a right-side flow-down area in which the game ball flows down in a second operation state different from the first operation state.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A display device capable of displaying a variation when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variation display.
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the holding means capable of suspending the execution of the variation display for the fulfillment of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters.
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion.
The operation instruction information display means for displaying the first instruction information corresponding to the first operation state or the second instruction information corresponding to the second operation state is provided.
As the game state,
A normal game state in which the game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting unit, and
The easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state.
An advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the winning easy gaming state is provided.
The game state control means
An approach normal control that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal gaming state, and an approach normal control in which the game ball enters the second starting portion from the normal gaming state during the advantageous gaming state. It is intended to perform easy entry control that can generate an easy entry easy state.
In the advantageous gaming state, the control of the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is changed from the easy entry control to the normal approach control, provided that the variable display of the number of times the upper limit is reached is executed. Migrate and
At the timing of transition to the approach normal control, if the second starting portion is in an approach-allowed posture in which the game ball can easily enter due to the approach-easy control, the maximum approach that can be taken is the maximum approach. Before the permissible time elapses, control is performed so that the state of the second starting portion shifts to an entry prohibited posture in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting portion.
After the transition from the easy approach control to the normal approach control in the advantageous gaming state, and after the state of the second starting portion shifts to the approach prohibition posture before the maximum approach allowable time elapses. During the predetermined period of the above, the operation instruction information display means does not display the first instruction information and the second instruction information .
Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2 is
A gaming area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and a player can change and operate the flow-down start position in the game area. The game area is set by a predetermined first operation state by the player. In a gaming machine provided with a left-side flow-down area in which the game ball flows down and a right-side flow-down area in which the game ball flows down in a second operation state different from the first operation state.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A display device capable of displaying a variation when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variation display.
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the holding means capable of suspending the execution of the variation display for the fulfillment of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters.
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion.
It is provided with an operation instruction sound output means for outputting the first instruction information corresponding to the first operation state or the second instruction information corresponding to the second operation state by an audio device.
As the game state,
A normal gaming state in which the first predetermined condition is satisfied by the first starting unit and the game is played.
The easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state.
An advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the winning easy gaming state is provided.
The game state control means
An approach normal control that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal gaming state, and an approach normal control in which the game ball enters the second starting portion from the normal gaming state during the advantageous gaming state. It is intended to perform easy entry control that can generate an easy entry easy state.
In the advantageous gaming state, the control of the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is changed from the easy entry control to the normal approach control, provided that the variable display of the number of times the upper limit is reached is executed. Migrate and
At the timing of transition to the approach normal control, if the second starting portion is in an approach-allowed posture in which the game ball can easily enter due to the approach-easy control, the maximum approach that can be taken is the maximum approach. Before the permissible time elapses, control is performed so that the state of the second starting portion shifts to an entry prohibited posture in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting portion.
After the transition from the easy approach control to the normal approach control in the advantageous gaming state, and after the state of the second starting portion shifts to the entry prohibition posture before the maximum approach allowable time elapses. During the predetermined period of the above, the operation instruction sound output means does not output the first instruction information and the second instruction information.
Further, the gaming machine according to claim 3 is
A gaming area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and a player can change and operate the flow-down start position in the game area. The game area is set by a predetermined first operation state by the player. In a gaming machine provided with a left-side flow-down area in which the game ball flows down and a right-side flow-down area in which the game ball flows down in a second operation state different from the first operation state.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A display device capable of displaying a variation when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variation display.
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the holding means capable of suspending the execution of the variation display for the fulfillment of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters.
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion.
The operation light emitting output means for outputting the first instruction information corresponding to the first operation state or the second instruction information corresponding to the second operation state by changing the mode of a predetermined light emitter is provided.
As the game state,
A normal gaming state in which the first predetermined condition is satisfied by the first starting unit and the game is played.
The easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state.
An advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the winning easy gaming state is provided.
The game state control means
An approach normal control that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal gaming state, and an approach normal control in which the game ball enters the second starting portion from the normal gaming state during the advantageous gaming state. It is intended to perform easy entry control that can generate an easy entry easy state.
In the advantageous gaming state, the control of the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is changed from the easy entry control to the normal approach control, provided that the variable display of the number of times the upper limit is reached is executed. Migrate and
At the timing of transition to the approach normal control, if the second starting portion is in an approach-allowed posture in which the game ball can easily enter due to the approach-easy control, the maximum approach that can be taken is the maximum approach. Before the permissible time elapses, control is performed so that the state of the second starting portion shifts to an entry prohibited posture in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting portion.
After the transition from the easy approach control to the normal approach control in the advantageous gaming state, and after the state of the second starting portion shifts to the approach prohibition posture before the maximum approach allowable time elapses. During the predetermined period of the above, the operation light emitting output means does not output the first instruction information and the second instruction information.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down through a predetermined entrance.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A display device capable of displaying a variation when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the variation display.
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display by the display device, the holding means capable of suspending the execution of the variation display for the fulfillment of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times.
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters, and
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters.
A variable winning section that takes multiple states with different ease of entry of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value when the game ball enters,
A game state control means for generating a plurality of types of game states by at least controlling the ease of entry of the game ball in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game ball in the variable winning portion is provided.
As the game state,
A normal game state in which the game is performed by satisfying the first predetermined condition by the first starting unit, and
The easy-to-win game state including a period in which the variable winning portion is in a state where the game ball can easily enter, which occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state.
The result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined, including one or more variation display executed after the winning easy game state and the display of the result information after the one or more variation display. It is a gaming state that transitions to another gaming state when it is displayed until the maximum number of games is reached.
When the result information corresponding to the winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information, the result information is based on the condition that it is easy to transition to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player from the establishment of the first predetermined condition in the normal gaming state. An advantageous gaming state is provided in which the transitioning gaming state is determined after is displayed.
The game state control means
An approach normal control that controls the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion during the normal gaming state, and an approach normal control in which the game ball enters the second starting portion from the normal gaming state during the advantageous gaming state. It is intended to perform easy entry control that generates an easy entry easy state.
When the variation display of the number of times that reaches the upper limit number of games is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the approach normal control.
At the start of the advantageous gaming state, the holding means performs different control depending on whether the execution of the variable display is held or not.
When the execution of the variation display is not suspended by the holding means at the start of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy approach control, and the advantageous gaming state is controlled. When the game ball enters the second starting portion after the start of the above, the first variation display is started, and immediately after the start of the first variation display or until a certain time elapses from the start of the first variation display. During the period of, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy entry control, and the approach is normal after the lapse of the period and before the end of the first variation display. A gaming machine characterized in that the ease of entry of a gaming ball into the second starting portion is controlled by control.

Images